Upload
vonhi
View
215
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit BreakersANSI 5/15 kV at 1200-3000 Amperes
250-1500 MVA, 60-95 kV BILIEC 3.6/17.5 kV at 630-2000 Amperes
25-40 kA, 40-95 kV BIL
The leading value-added modularapproach for assembling metal-cladswitchgear featuring Cutler-Hammermedium voltage vacuum circuitbreakers, structures and accessories.
The World’s Most CompleteLine of Medium VoltageVacuum Circuit Breakers
Breaker Type Voltage Class Insulation BIL Interrupting Ratings Continuous Current Application
VCPW-ND ANSI 5 kV 60 kV 250 MVA 1200A 26" Wide New Metal-Clad Switchgear
IEC 3.6-7.2 kV 40-60 kV 25-31.5 kA 630-1250Aor Upgrades to Existing Airbreak Switchgear
VCP-W ANSI 5-15 kV 60-95 kV 250-1500 MVA 1200-3000A 36" Wide New Metal-Clad Switchgear
IEC 3.6-17.5 kV 40-95 kV 25-40 kA 630-2000Aor Upgrades to Existing Switchgear
VCPW-SE ANSI 5-15 kV 60-95 kV 250-1500 MVA 1200-3000A 36" Wide Special Environment Metal-Clad
IEC 3.6-17.5 kV 40-95 kV 25-40 kA 630-2000ASwitchgear Featuring Breakers with CycloaliphaticEpoxy Insulation for Harsh Industrial Environments
VCP-W ANSI 27 kV 125 kV 16-40 kA 600-2000A 36" Wide Metal-Clad Switchgear
IEC 24 kV 125 kV 16-25 kA 630-2000Aor Upgrades to Existing Switchgear
VCP-W ANSI 38 kV 170 kV 16-40 kA, 600-2500A 42" Wide Metal-Clad Switchgear1500 MVA
VCP-W (Outdoor) ANSI 15.5 kV 110 kV 16-31.5 kA 600-1200A Outdoor Station Distribution Breakers
W-VAC IEC 3.6-17.5 kV 40-95 kV 16-40 kA 630-2000A 600-750 mm Wide IEC Medium Voltage Switchgear
W-VAC IEC 3.6-17.5 kV 40-95 kV 31.5-50 kA 2500-3150A 1000 mm Wide IEC Medium Voltage Switchgear
W-VAC IEC 36 kV 170 kV 16-31.5 kA 630-2000A 42" Wide IEC Metal-Clad Switchgear
DHP-VR ANSI 5-15 kV 60-95 kV 250-1000 MVA 1200-3000A DHP Metal-Clad Switchgear Technology Upgradeswith the DHP-VR Direct Roll-in Vacuum Replace-ment Breakers from the Original Manufacturer
VCP-WR ANSI 5-15 kV 60-95 kV 250-1500 MVA 1200-3000A Modular Fixed Vacuum Circuit Breakers in 18", 20",and 29" Widths for Conversions/Retrofits, MetalEnclosed Switchgear and Mining Switchgear
VCP-WC ANSI 5-17.5kV 95kV 25-63kA 1200-3000A 36" wide Metal-Clad Switchgear
VCP-WG ANSI 5-15kV 95kV 50-63kA 1200-3000A 36" wide Metal-Clad Switchgear
VCP-T ANSI 5-15kV 95kV 16-25kA 800-1200A Smaller frame breaker
VCP-TR IEC 3.6-17.5kV 95kV 16-25kA 630-1250A Smaller frame breaker
Series 18, 20, and 29
MED
IUM
VOL
TAGE
VAC
UUM
CIRC
UIT
BREA
KERS
Eaton CorporationCutler-Hammer business unit1000 Cherrington ParkwayMoon Township, PA 15108United Statestel: 1-800-525-2000www.cutler-hammer.com
© 2003 EATON CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
PRINTED IN USA
FORM NO. BR01301006E
SEPTEMBER 2003
OEMSWITCHGEARCOMPONENTPRODUCTS
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
2 11
VacClad-W, the Cutler-Hammer vacuumswitchgear family, has been engineeredto feature a standardized design, inter-changeable parts, slot and tab construction,and industry-leading vacuum interruptertechnology. This world class switchgearincludes the Type VCP-W Vacuum CircuitBreaker which meets both ANSI and IECelectrical standards.
Industry-Leading Vacuum TechnologyProvides Unequaled Reliability
Cutler-Hammer now provides the industry’smost complete family of technologicallyadvanced vacuum circuit breakers at 5 kV,15 kV, 27 kV, and 38 kV. Type VCP-WVacuum Circuit Breakers incorporate manydesign features which have been fieldproven with more than 25 years of vacuuminterrupter design and manufacturingexperience…coupled with over 70 yearsof power circuit breaker design and manu-facturing experience.
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers areavailable in a complete range of ANSI andIEC ratings:
ANSI 5 kV through 38 kV,continuous currents from600 through 3000 amperes.
IEC 3.6 kV through 36 kV,continuous currents from630 through 2000 amperes.
ISO Certified Facilities
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers,including the vacuum interrupter, are as-sembled by Cutler-Hammer in ISO 9002certified facilities. The breakers are fullytested to ANSI and IEC standards andeach is provided with its unique QualityAssurance Certificate that documents alltests and inspections performed.
Assembly Flexibility
Assembly flexibility is provided with avariety of industry leading value-addedapproaches for assembling premiermetal-clad switchgear. Customers havethe unique opportunity to select the appro-priate building block approach to matchtheir manufacturing capabilities with thoseof Cutler-Hammer.
Power ModulesComplete StructuresIncluding Fully Equipped BreakerCompartment and Auxiliary Provisions
Mini ModulesA Simple Building Block ApproachEasily Configured to Any Project Specification
Mini Modules Configured as:■ A One-High Fully Equipped Breaker
Compartment for 1200, 2000,or 3000 Amperes.
Circuit Breaker Compartment KitsProvide the Opportunity to Add the MostValue and Include All Key Breaker/CellInterfacing Parts Necessary to Builda Breaker Compartment
The OEM Value-Added Approach to Circuit Protection…Flexibility that Exceeds the Customer’s Requirements
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit BreakersIndustry Leading Vacuum Technologyin ANSI 5/15 kV or IEC 3.6/17.5 kV■ Type VCP-W.■ Type VCPW-SE.■ Type VCPW-ND.
5/15 kV Medium Voltage BreakerRating Chart
Identification Rated Values WeightCircuit Nominal Nominal Voltage Insulation Level Current Interrupting Permissible Maximum Current ValuesBreaker Voltage 3-Phase Maximum Voltage Withstand Continuous Short Time➃ Tripping Voltage Maximum Closing and Closing andType Class MVA Voltage Range Test Voltage Current Circuit Delay Divided Symmetrical Latching LatchingClass Factor➂ at 60 Hz Current by K Interrupting Capability Capability
(at Rated Capability MomentaryMaximum kV)Power Impulse K Times 2.7 K 1.6 K
Frequency Rated Short Times Rated Times Rated(1 Minute) Circuit Short Circuit Short Circuit
Current➂ Current Current
E K I Y E/KkV MVA kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms Cycles Seconds kV rms kA rms kA Peak kA rms lbs.
50VCPW-ND250 4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200 29 5 2 3.85 36 97 58 34550VCP-W250 4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200 29 5 2 3.85 36 97 58 350
2000 132➁ 78➁ 4103000 525
50VCP-W350 4.16 350 4.76 1.19 19 60 1200 41 5 2 4.00 49 132 78 4602000 4903000 525
75VCP-W500 7.2 500 8.25 1.25 36 95 1200 33 5 2 6.60 41 111 66 3752000 4103000 525
150VCP-W500 13.8 500 15.00 1.30 36 95 1200 18 5 2 11.50 23 62 37 3502000 97➁ 58➁ 4103000 525
150VCP-W750 13.8 750 15.00 1.30 36 95 1200 28 5 2 11.50 36 97 58 3502000 130➁ 77➁ 4103000 525
150VCP-W1000 13.8 1000 15.00 1.30 36 95 1200 37 5 2 11.50 48 130 77 4602000 4903000 525
150VCP-W1500 13.8 1500 15.00 1.00 36 95 1200 63 5 2 15.00 63 170 101 5252000 5303000 550
ANSI Standards – Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis➀
IEC-56 Standards – Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis➅
Identification Rated Values WeightCircuit Voltage Insulation Level Normal Short Short Short CableBreaker Class Power Impulse Current Circuit Time Circuit ChargingType Frequency Withstand Breaking (3 Second) Making Breaking
Current Current Current Current
kV rms kV Peak kV Peak Amperes kA rms kA rms kA Peak Amperes kg
36VCPW-ND25 3.6 10 40 630, 1250 25 25 63 25 15936VCPW-ND32 3.6 10 40 630, 1250 31.5 31.5 79 25 15972VCPW-ND25 7.2 20 60 630, 1250 25 25 63 25 15972VCPW-ND32 7.2 20 60 630, 1250 31.5 31.5 79 25 15936VCP-W25 3.6 10 40 630, 1250, 2000 25 25 63 25 18836VCP-W32 3.6 10 40 1250, 2000 31.5 31.5 79 25 18836VCP-W40 3.6 10 40 1250, 2000 40 40 100 25 22572VCP-W25 7.2 20 60 630, 1250, 2000 25 25 63 25 18872VCP-W32 7.2 20 60 1250, 2000 31.5 31.5 79 25 18872VCP-W40 7.2 20 60 1250, 2000 40 40 100 25 225120VCP-W25 12 28 75 630, 1250, 2000 25 25 63 25 195120VCP-W32 12 28 75 1250, 2000 31.5 31.5 79 25 195120VCP-W40 12 28 75 1250, 2000 40 40 100 25 225175VCP-W25 17.5 38 95 1250, 2000 25 25 63 31.5 195175VCP-W32 17.5 38 95 1250, 2000 31.5 31.5 79 31.5 195175VCP-W40 17.5 38 95 1250, 2000 40 40 100 31.5 225
➀ Applicable ANSI standards C37.04 - 1979, C37.09 - 1979, and C37.06 -1987. Operating duty cycle CO-15 seconds-CO. Operating time values:opening 30-45 ms, closing 45-60 ms and reclosing 18 cycles (300 ms).
➁ Nonstandard circuit breakers with High Close and Latch (momentary)rating for special applications.
➂ Consult Application Data 32-265 for further information.
➃ Optional interrupting time of 3 cycles is available.
➄ Also 3 second short time current carrying capability.
➅ Interrupting time is 3 cycles at 50/60 Hz. Rated operating sequence:O-3 minutes-CO-3 minutes-CO.
Auxiliary Drawer Compartment KitsAll Parts Necessary for Building PotentialTransformer, Control Power Transformer,or Fuse Drawer Compartments
Tools and AccessoriesA Complete Selection of Standardand Optional Tools and Accessories
The Industry Leaderin Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
2 11
VacClad-W, the Cutler-Hammer vacuumswitchgear family, has been engineeredto feature a standardized design, inter-changeable parts, slot and tab construction,and industry-leading vacuum interruptertechnology. This world class switchgearincludes the Type VCP-W Vacuum CircuitBreaker which meets both ANSI and IECelectrical standards.
Industry-Leading Vacuum TechnologyProvides Unequaled Reliability
Cutler-Hammer now provides the industry’smost complete family of technologicallyadvanced vacuum circuit breakers at 5 kV,15 kV, 27 kV, and 38 kV. Type VCP-WVacuum Circuit Breakers incorporate manydesign features which have been fieldproven with more than 25 years of vacuuminterrupter design and manufacturingexperience…coupled with over 70 yearsof power circuit breaker design and manu-facturing experience.
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers areavailable in a complete range of ANSI andIEC ratings:
ANSI 5 kV through 38 kV,continuous currents from600 through 3000 amperes.
IEC 3.6 kV through 36 kV,continuous currents from630 through 2000 amperes.
ISO Certified Facilities
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers,including the vacuum interrupter, are as-sembled by Cutler-Hammer in ISO 9002certified facilities. The breakers are fullytested to ANSI and IEC standards andeach is provided with its unique QualityAssurance Certificate that documents alltests and inspections performed.
Assembly Flexibility
Assembly flexibility is provided with avariety of industry leading value-addedapproaches for assembling premiermetal-clad switchgear. Customers havethe unique opportunity to select the appro-priate building block approach to matchtheir manufacturing capabilities with thoseof Cutler-Hammer.
Power ModulesComplete StructuresIncluding Fully Equipped BreakerCompartment and Auxiliary Provisions
Mini ModulesA Simple Building Block ApproachEasily Configured to Any Project Specification
Mini Modules Configured as:■ A One-High Fully Equipped Breaker
Compartment for 1200, 2000,or 3000 Amperes.
Circuit Breaker Compartment KitsProvide the Opportunity to Add the MostValue and Include All Key Breaker/CellInterfacing Parts Necessary to Builda Breaker Compartment
The OEM Value-Added Approach to Circuit Protection…Flexibility that Exceeds the Customer’s Requirements
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit BreakersIndustry Leading Vacuum Technologyin ANSI 5/15 kV or IEC 3.6/17.5 kV■ Type VCP-W.■ Type VCPW-SE.■ Type VCPW-ND.
5/15 kV Medium Voltage BreakerRating Chart
Identification Rated Values WeightCircuit Nominal Nominal Voltage Insulation Level Current Interrupting Permissible Maximum Current ValuesBreaker Voltage 3-Phase Maximum Voltage Withstand Continuous Short Time➃ Tripping Voltage Maximum Closing and Closing andType Class MVA Voltage Range Test Voltage Current Circuit Delay Divided Symmetrical Latching LatchingClass Factor➂ at 60 Hz Current by K Interrupting Capability Capability
(at Rated Capability MomentaryMaximum kV)Power Impulse K Times 2.7 K 1.6 K
Frequency Rated Short Times Rated Times Rated(1 Minute) Circuit Short Circuit Short Circuit
Current➂ Current Current
E K I Y E/KkV MVA kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms Cycles Seconds kV rms kA rms kA Peak kA rms lbs.
50VCPW-ND250 4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200 29 5 2 3.85 36 97 58 34550VCP-W250 4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200 29 5 2 3.85 36 97 58 350
2000 132➁ 78➁ 4103000 525
50VCP-W350 4.16 350 4.76 1.19 19 60 1200 41 5 2 4.00 49 132 78 4602000 4903000 525
75VCP-W500 7.2 500 8.25 1.25 36 95 1200 33 5 2 6.60 41 111 66 3752000 4103000 525
150VCP-W500 13.8 500 15.00 1.30 36 95 1200 18 5 2 11.50 23 62 37 3502000 97➁ 58➁ 4103000 525
150VCP-W750 13.8 750 15.00 1.30 36 95 1200 28 5 2 11.50 36 97 58 3502000 130➁ 77➁ 4103000 525
150VCP-W1000 13.8 1000 15.00 1.30 36 95 1200 37 5 2 11.50 48 130 77 4602000 4903000 525
150VCP-W1500 13.8 1500 15.00 1.00 36 95 1200 63 5 2 15.00 63 170 101 5252000 5303000 550
ANSI Standards – Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis➀
IEC-56 Standards – Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis➅
Identification Rated Values WeightCircuit Voltage Insulation Level Normal Short Short Short CableBreaker Class Power Impulse Current Circuit Time Circuit ChargingType Frequency Withstand Breaking (3 Second) Making Breaking
Current Current Current Current
kV rms kV Peak kV Peak Amperes kA rms kA rms kA Peak Amperes kg
36VCPW-ND25 3.6 10 40 630, 1250 25 25 63 25 15936VCPW-ND32 3.6 10 40 630, 1250 31.5 31.5 79 25 15972VCPW-ND25 7.2 20 60 630, 1250 25 25 63 25 15972VCPW-ND32 7.2 20 60 630, 1250 31.5 31.5 79 25 15936VCP-W25 3.6 10 40 630, 1250, 2000 25 25 63 25 18836VCP-W32 3.6 10 40 1250, 2000 31.5 31.5 79 25 18836VCP-W40 3.6 10 40 1250, 2000 40 40 100 25 22572VCP-W25 7.2 20 60 630, 1250, 2000 25 25 63 25 18872VCP-W32 7.2 20 60 1250, 2000 31.5 31.5 79 25 18872VCP-W40 7.2 20 60 1250, 2000 40 40 100 25 225120VCP-W25 12 28 75 630, 1250, 2000 25 25 63 25 195120VCP-W32 12 28 75 1250, 2000 31.5 31.5 79 25 195120VCP-W40 12 28 75 1250, 2000 40 40 100 25 225175VCP-W25 17.5 38 95 1250, 2000 25 25 63 31.5 195175VCP-W32 17.5 38 95 1250, 2000 31.5 31.5 79 31.5 195175VCP-W40 17.5 38 95 1250, 2000 40 40 100 31.5 225
➀ Applicable ANSI standards C37.04 - 1979, C37.09 - 1979, and C37.06 -1987. Operating duty cycle CO-15 seconds-CO. Operating time values:opening 30-45 ms, closing 45-60 ms and reclosing 18 cycles (300 ms).
➁ Nonstandard circuit breakers with High Close and Latch (momentary)rating for special applications.
➂ Consult Application Data 32-265 for further information.
➃ Optional interrupting time of 3 cycles is available.
➄ Also 3 second short time current carrying capability.
➅ Interrupting time is 3 cycles at 50/60 Hz. Rated operating sequence:O-3 minutes-CO-3 minutes-CO.
Auxiliary Drawer Compartment KitsAll Parts Necessary for Building PotentialTransformer, Control Power Transformer,or Fuse Drawer Compartments
Tools and AccessoriesA Complete Selection of Standardand Optional Tools and Accessories
The Industry Leaderin Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
InterrupterStem
ContactSegments
DrivingForceon theColumnarArc
Arc
CurrentPath
FaultCurrent
RecoveryVoltage
Time, ms Time, µs
High Current
Arc Mode
Arc
Initiation
Current
Zero
Arcing and Interruption Phenomena of Relevance to AC Switching
10 3
Industry Leading VacuumTechnology Enhances Breakerand Switchgear Reliability
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers
The highly dependable performance ofCutler-Hammer vacuum circuit breakersresults from our commitment to a continu-ing research and development program.
Beginning with early research in 1929, wehave been a leader in the vacuum inter-rupter field. Production was launched inthe mid-1960s, and since that time hun-dreds of thousands of vacuum interruptershave been in reliable operation worldwide.
Cutler-Hammer experience has resultedin many significant vacuum interrupterbreakthroughs including:
■ Copper chrome contact materialsthat provide longer life.
■ A smaller envelope size withhigher performance.
■ Lower chop currents.■ Improved dielectric strength.
Consequently, Cutler-Hammer vacuuminterrupters are maintenance free…andprovide increased service life and opti-mum operator safety.
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit BreakersAre Designed with the PatentedV-Flex Nonsliding, NonrollingCurrent Transfer System
The current transfer system consists of aseries of tin-plated, high-conductivity cop-per leaf conductors that are swaged ontothe movable interrupter stem.
Metering, Protection,and Communications
PROTECTIVE RELAYS
MP-3000Award-WinningMotor Protection
The MP-3000, winnerof a Plant Engineeringmagazine Product ofthe Year award, pro-tects three-phase in-duction motors of anysize and voltage. In-tegral Intel-I-Trip™
overload protectiondevelops protectioncurves based on mo-tor data and adaptive characteristics based on mea-sured RTD temperatures. The MP-3000 recordsmotor history and time-stamped event logging innonvolatile memory. This device is available in aquick-release drawout case model.
FP-5000IntegratedProtection,Metering andControl for ElectricPower Distribution
The FP-5000 providesadvanced protectionfor mains, tiers andfeeder circuits of anyvoltage level. This de-vice provides com-plete three-phase and ground protection, timeovercurrent protection with 11 user-selectable char-acteristic curve shapes, three custom curves, overand under voltage and frequency protection, phasesequence voltage protection, current unbalance pro-tection and breaker failure protection. It providescomplete metering and advanced data logging ca-pabilities. The FP-5000 is available in a quick-release drawout case model.
Digitrip 3000Increased Protectionfor Medium VoltageCircuit Breakers
The Digitrip 3000 providesthree-phase and groundovercurrent instantaneousprotection in a single, cost-effective package. It alsoprovides current and moni-toring capability. Optionalzone selective interlocking is an alternative to highbus cost differential protection. The selectable longtime curve slope (ANSI: Moderately inverse, veryinverse, and extremely inverse and thermal curves:It, T2t, T4t, flat) provides protection for a wide rangeof protection capability in a single device.
Cutler-Hammer Power Management Productsprovide the solutions to monitor and manageall aspects of an electrical distribution system.These innovative meters, relays and com-munications software applications make itpossible to realize greater reliability, increasedproductivity and significant cost savings.
METERS
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 SeriesThe Premier PowerQuality Meter
The IQ Analyzer pro-vides comprehensivediagnostic capabilitieswith over 150 meteredvalues. This device as-sists in preventing pro-cess disruptions andequipment damage bystoring trends, analyz-ing harmonics and capturing waveforms. Historicaldata captured by the IQ Analyzer helps to identifyproblems in an electrical distribution system. Energyusage and costs are controllable through highlyaccurate energy measurement, on-board energyvalue storage and time-of-use energy registers.Optional graphical waveform and harmonic spec-trum display available on the 6600 series.
IQ DP-4000Metering and VoltageProtection
The IQ DP-4000 providescomplete electrical me-tering and system voltageprotection. This devicemeasures and displaysover 74 electrical systemvalues. It measures % total harmonic distortion(%THD) for both current and voltage to help find thesource of problems. The IQ DP-4000 keeps track oftotal energy used along with the maximum demandto aid in energy management. Optional digital I/Oavailable on the 4100 series.
IQ 200Switchboard Metering
The IQ 200 family is a group ofrevenue accurate ANSIC12.16 meters that provide bigfeatures in a small and flexiblepackage. They are ideal forpanelboard and switchboard applications wherepanel space is at a premium. Energy managementinformation is provided by direct reading of meteredvalues. With built-in communications the IQ 200base can be used as a metering transducer forsubmetering applications.
Unique swaged design benefits include:
■ Improved current flow becausethe multipoint contact offers verylow electrical and thermal resistance.
■ Unlike sliding or rolling designs,there are no moving parts to wearout…therefore, no maintenance.
■ Longer circuit breaker service life.
Arcing and Interruption Phenomenaof Relevance to AC Switching
The important arcing and interruption phenomenathat occur during fault current interruption in a vacuumare depicted above. These phenomena influencethe design of the interrupter, particularly its size,configuration, and material of the contacts. Fulldielectric strength is re-established to withstandtransient recovery voltage (TRV) within a few micro-seconds, the fastest available.
Arcing and Interruption in Vacuum
Inside the vacuum bottle, the spiral contact designconfiguration provides a self-induced magneticeffect that moves the arc root around the contactperiphery. This type of arc control prevents hot spotformations and minimizes electrode erosion. Thelow resistance of the spiral design results in lessheat to dissipate, providing the smallest possibleenvelope size.
Nonsliding Current Transfer System
Connecting each leaf conductor to the vacuuminterrupter stem initiates a flattening operation of thesegments which are, in turn, swaged into contactwith the stem. Each leaf, therefore, provides amultipoint connection. As the stem moves up anddown, the V-Flex system flexes, eliminating thesliding action to provide a minimal wear and main-tenance-free system.
COMMUNICATIONS
PowerNetFlexible PowerManagement System
PowerNet software isdesigned to manage thepower distribution system. It’s ideal for managingenergy usage and costs, troubleshooting powerquality problems and ensuring the reliability andintegrity of the electrical distribution system. APowerNet Power Management System consists ofPowerNet software networked with meters, relays,trip units, motor protectors, starters and transferswitch controllers. PowerNet has an extensive li-brary of third-party interfaces, facilitating integrationwith other manufacturers’ devices and building man-agement systems.
PowerPortSingle Device Monitoring and Configuration Software
PowerPort is free software downloadable from http://www.ch.cutlerhammer.com/pmp/PowerPort.html. It isa scaled-down version of Power Net. PowerPortsimplifies the setup and configuration of select Cut-ler-Hammer devices, including the IQ Analyzer, MP-3000 and FP-5000, by enabling the user to enter thedevice setpoints via a user-friendly PC interface.Then the information can be downloaded to thedevice, eliminating the need to scroll through thedevice menu at the faceplate. A single device can bemonitored via PowerPort.
GENESIS32™
Web-Based HMISoftware
GENESIS32 is Cutler-Hammer’s graphical solutionand includes GraphWorx, TrendWorx, AlarmWorxand Web HMI software. The basic bundle alsoincludes an integrators tool of Modbus to OPC tofacilitate the communications with Modbus devicesin your network. These applications provide custom-ized graphical displays, ease of integration andportability of data throughout the enterprise network,even via a web browser thin client. This bundleprovides the flexible and powerful graphic applica-tions that are easily deployed.
GENESIS32 is a trademark of ICONICS.
ACCESSORIES
EZC Minalites®
Compact indicating lights for general indicating orsignaling. They are quickly and easily mounted onpanels up to and including 1/4 inch in thickness.Round and rectangular designs are available.
V-Flex System
World-class VCP-W Vacuum CircuitBreakers designed with a patentedV-Flex nonsliding current transfersystem.
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
InterrupterStem
ContactSegments
DrivingForceon theColumnarArc
Arc
CurrentPath
FaultCurrent
RecoveryVoltage
Time, ms Time, µs
High Current
Arc Mode
Arc
Initiation
Current
Zero
Arcing and Interruption Phenomena of Relevance to AC Switching
10 3
Industry Leading VacuumTechnology Enhances Breakerand Switchgear Reliability
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers
The highly dependable performance ofCutler-Hammer vacuum circuit breakersresults from our commitment to a continu-ing research and development program.
Beginning with early research in 1929, wehave been a leader in the vacuum inter-rupter field. Production was launched inthe mid-1960s, and since that time hun-dreds of thousands of vacuum interruptershave been in reliable operation worldwide.
Cutler-Hammer experience has resultedin many significant vacuum interrupterbreakthroughs including:
■ Copper chrome contact materialsthat provide longer life.
■ A smaller envelope size withhigher performance.
■ Lower chop currents.■ Improved dielectric strength.
Consequently, Cutler-Hammer vacuuminterrupters are maintenance free…andprovide increased service life and opti-mum operator safety.
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit BreakersAre Designed with the PatentedV-Flex Nonsliding, NonrollingCurrent Transfer System
The current transfer system consists of aseries of tin-plated, high-conductivity cop-per leaf conductors that are swaged ontothe movable interrupter stem.
Metering, Protection,and Communications
PROTECTIVE RELAYS
MP-3000Award-WinningMotor Protection
The MP-3000, winnerof a Plant Engineeringmagazine Product ofthe Year award, pro-tects three-phase in-duction motors of anysize and voltage. In-tegral Intel-I-Trip™
overload protectiondevelops protectioncurves based on mo-tor data and adaptive characteristics based on mea-sured RTD temperatures. The MP-3000 recordsmotor history and time-stamped event logging innonvolatile memory. This device is available in aquick-release drawout case model.
FP-5000IntegratedProtection,Metering andControl for ElectricPower Distribution
The FP-5000 providesadvanced protectionfor mains, tiers andfeeder circuits of anyvoltage level. This de-vice provides com-plete three-phase and ground protection, timeovercurrent protection with 11 user-selectable char-acteristic curve shapes, three custom curves, overand under voltage and frequency protection, phasesequence voltage protection, current unbalance pro-tection and breaker failure protection. It providescomplete metering and advanced data logging ca-pabilities. The FP-5000 is available in a quick-release drawout case model.
Digitrip 3000Increased Protectionfor Medium VoltageCircuit Breakers
The Digitrip 3000 providesthree-phase and groundovercurrent instantaneousprotection in a single, cost-effective package. It alsoprovides current and moni-toring capability. Optionalzone selective interlocking is an alternative to highbus cost differential protection. The selectable longtime curve slope (ANSI: Moderately inverse, veryinverse, and extremely inverse and thermal curves:It, T2t, T4t, flat) provides protection for a wide rangeof protection capability in a single device.
Cutler-Hammer Power Management Productsprovide the solutions to monitor and manageall aspects of an electrical distribution system.These innovative meters, relays and com-munications software applications make itpossible to realize greater reliability, increasedproductivity and significant cost savings.
METERS
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 SeriesThe Premier PowerQuality Meter
The IQ Analyzer pro-vides comprehensivediagnostic capabilitieswith over 150 meteredvalues. This device as-sists in preventing pro-cess disruptions andequipment damage bystoring trends, analyz-ing harmonics and capturing waveforms. Historicaldata captured by the IQ Analyzer helps to identifyproblems in an electrical distribution system. Energyusage and costs are controllable through highlyaccurate energy measurement, on-board energyvalue storage and time-of-use energy registers.Optional graphical waveform and harmonic spec-trum display available on the 6600 series.
IQ DP-4000Metering and VoltageProtection
The IQ DP-4000 providescomplete electrical me-tering and system voltageprotection. This devicemeasures and displaysover 74 electrical systemvalues. It measures % total harmonic distortion(%THD) for both current and voltage to help find thesource of problems. The IQ DP-4000 keeps track oftotal energy used along with the maximum demandto aid in energy management. Optional digital I/Oavailable on the 4100 series.
IQ 200Switchboard Metering
The IQ 200 family is a group ofrevenue accurate ANSIC12.16 meters that provide bigfeatures in a small and flexiblepackage. They are ideal forpanelboard and switchboard applications wherepanel space is at a premium. Energy managementinformation is provided by direct reading of meteredvalues. With built-in communications the IQ 200base can be used as a metering transducer forsubmetering applications.
Unique swaged design benefits include:
■ Improved current flow becausethe multipoint contact offers verylow electrical and thermal resistance.
■ Unlike sliding or rolling designs,there are no moving parts to wearout…therefore, no maintenance.
■ Longer circuit breaker service life.
Arcing and Interruption Phenomenaof Relevance to AC Switching
The important arcing and interruption phenomenathat occur during fault current interruption in a vacuumare depicted above. These phenomena influencethe design of the interrupter, particularly its size,configuration, and material of the contacts. Fulldielectric strength is re-established to withstandtransient recovery voltage (TRV) within a few micro-seconds, the fastest available.
Arcing and Interruption in Vacuum
Inside the vacuum bottle, the spiral contact designconfiguration provides a self-induced magneticeffect that moves the arc root around the contactperiphery. This type of arc control prevents hot spotformations and minimizes electrode erosion. Thelow resistance of the spiral design results in lessheat to dissipate, providing the smallest possibleenvelope size.
Nonsliding Current Transfer System
Connecting each leaf conductor to the vacuuminterrupter stem initiates a flattening operation of thesegments which are, in turn, swaged into contactwith the stem. Each leaf, therefore, provides amultipoint connection. As the stem moves up anddown, the V-Flex system flexes, eliminating thesliding action to provide a minimal wear and main-tenance-free system.
COMMUNICATIONS
PowerNetFlexible PowerManagement System
PowerNet software isdesigned to manage thepower distribution system. It’s ideal for managingenergy usage and costs, troubleshooting powerquality problems and ensuring the reliability andintegrity of the electrical distribution system. APowerNet Power Management System consists ofPowerNet software networked with meters, relays,trip units, motor protectors, starters and transferswitch controllers. PowerNet has an extensive li-brary of third-party interfaces, facilitating integrationwith other manufacturers’ devices and building man-agement systems.
PowerPortSingle Device Monitoring and Configuration Software
PowerPort is free software downloadable from http://www.ch.cutlerhammer.com/pmp/PowerPort.html. It isa scaled-down version of Power Net. PowerPortsimplifies the setup and configuration of select Cut-ler-Hammer devices, including the IQ Analyzer, MP-3000 and FP-5000, by enabling the user to enter thedevice setpoints via a user-friendly PC interface.Then the information can be downloaded to thedevice, eliminating the need to scroll through thedevice menu at the faceplate. A single device can bemonitored via PowerPort.
GENESIS32™
Web-Based HMISoftware
GENESIS32 is Cutler-Hammer’s graphical solutionand includes GraphWorx, TrendWorx, AlarmWorxand Web HMI software. The basic bundle alsoincludes an integrators tool of Modbus to OPC tofacilitate the communications with Modbus devicesin your network. These applications provide custom-ized graphical displays, ease of integration andportability of data throughout the enterprise network,even via a web browser thin client. This bundleprovides the flexible and powerful graphic applica-tions that are easily deployed.
GENESIS32 is a trademark of ICONICS.
ACCESSORIES
EZC Minalites®
Compact indicating lights for general indicating orsignaling. They are quickly and easily mounted onpanels up to and including 1/4 inch in thickness.Round and rectangular designs are available.
V-Flex System
World-class VCP-W Vacuum CircuitBreakers designed with a patentedV-Flex nonsliding current transfersystem.
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
4 9
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker…A New Level of Standardization
All Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers,regardless of voltage or interrupting ca-pacity, have the same time proven storedenergy mechanism…and are significantlysmaller than conventional medium voltagedrawout breakers in both size and weight.Refer to weights table on page 11.
Three Methods of Easy Installation
Lower Compartment Installation1. A roll off the floor ramp.2. A dockable dolly.
The floor ramp or dockable dolly is usedfor quick lower cell installation or removal.
Upper and Lower Compartment Installation3. A lifting yoke that is compatible with
any standard lifting device.
Since the breaker rides on extension rails,alignment problems are eliminated andinstallation time is reduced. Additionally,a position indicator shows when thebreaker is in the fully connected or dis-connected position.
Designed for Operator Safety
Two dead front shields are provided toisolate the operator from high voltagewhen the breaker is energized.
During levering, safety interlocks renderthe breaker mechanically trip free and thebreaker is grounded throughout its travel.The “T” handle latch which engages anddisengages the breaker is at the bottomof the breaker, far from energized parts.
When the breaker is withdrawn, steel shut-ters automatically rotate to cover the pri-mary disconnect supports…and a currenttransformer barrier is located in front of theshutters. This prevents the operator fromaccidental contact with primary voltageparts and controls.
Tools and Accessories
Cutler-Hammer provides several standard and optional accessories including equipment used to transportthe breaker and lift and lever it into a compartment, as well as a manually operated ground and test device.
Standard accessoriesinclude (top to bot-tom): manual charg-ing handle, left andright removable exten-sion rails, rail clamps,and levering crank.
The optional por-table lifter is usedto lift the breakerfrom or onto theextension rails.
A roll off the floor ramp is used tomove the lower breaker from thefloor to the bottom compartment.
Optional ground and test devices,include manually operated, “BailType” manually operated, electricallyoperated, and “Consolidated Edison”user type (shown). Dummy elementsare also available.
A dockable dollyfor transporting thelower breaker to orfrom the lower com-partment.
Optional accessoriesinclude (clockwise):lifting yoke, test cabi-net, spin-free leveringcrank, and test jumper.
1
2 4
5
13
14
12
■12 Front panel controls and indicators
■13 Removable dead front cover
■14 “T” handle latch
■15 Drawout type secondaries
9
8
7
11
10
VCP-W Vacuum CircuitBreaker Compartment
■1 Metal shutters
■2 Ground stab assembly
■3 Breaker position indicator
■4 Levering mechanism
■5 MOC/TOC switch location
■6 Drawout type secondaries
VCP-W VacuumCircuit Breaker
■7 Vacuum interrupter
■8 Patented V-Flex nonsliding, non-rolling current transfer system
■9 Direct reading contacterosion indicator
■10 Breaker wheels
■11 Removable glass polyesterinsulating barriers
15
6
3
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
4 9
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker…A New Level of Standardization
All Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers,regardless of voltage or interrupting ca-pacity, have the same time proven storedenergy mechanism…and are significantlysmaller than conventional medium voltagedrawout breakers in both size and weight.Refer to weights table on page 11.
Three Methods of Easy Installation
Lower Compartment Installation1. A roll off the floor ramp.2. A dockable dolly.
The floor ramp or dockable dolly is usedfor quick lower cell installation or removal.
Upper and Lower Compartment Installation3. A lifting yoke that is compatible with
any standard lifting device.
Since the breaker rides on extension rails,alignment problems are eliminated andinstallation time is reduced. Additionally,a position indicator shows when thebreaker is in the fully connected or dis-connected position.
Designed for Operator Safety
Two dead front shields are provided toisolate the operator from high voltagewhen the breaker is energized.
During levering, safety interlocks renderthe breaker mechanically trip free and thebreaker is grounded throughout its travel.The “T” handle latch which engages anddisengages the breaker is at the bottomof the breaker, far from energized parts.
When the breaker is withdrawn, steel shut-ters automatically rotate to cover the pri-mary disconnect supports…and a currenttransformer barrier is located in front of theshutters. This prevents the operator fromaccidental contact with primary voltageparts and controls.
Tools and Accessories
Cutler-Hammer provides several standard and optional accessories including equipment used to transportthe breaker and lift and lever it into a compartment, as well as a manually operated ground and test device.
Standard accessoriesinclude (top to bot-tom): manual charg-ing handle, left andright removable exten-sion rails, rail clamps,and levering crank.
The optional por-table lifter is usedto lift the breakerfrom or onto theextension rails.
A roll off the floor ramp is used tomove the lower breaker from thefloor to the bottom compartment.
Optional ground and test devices,include manually operated, “BailType” manually operated, electricallyoperated, and “Consolidated Edison”user type (shown). Dummy elementsare also available.
A dockable dollyfor transporting thelower breaker to orfrom the lower com-partment.
Optional accessoriesinclude (clockwise):lifting yoke, test cabi-net, spin-free leveringcrank, and test jumper.
1
2 4
5
13
14
12
■12 Front panel controls and indicators
■13 Removable dead front cover
■14 “T” handle latch
■15 Drawout type secondaries
9
8
7
11
10
VCP-W Vacuum CircuitBreaker Compartment
■1 Metal shutters
■2 Ground stab assembly
■3 Breaker position indicator
■4 Levering mechanism
■5 MOC/TOC switch location
■6 Drawout type secondaries
VCP-W VacuumCircuit Breaker
■7 Vacuum interrupter
■8 Patented V-Flex nonsliding, non-rolling current transfer system
■9 Direct reading contacterosion indicator
■10 Breaker wheels
■11 Removable glass polyesterinsulating barriers
15
6
3
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
8 5
User-Friendly Operation
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakercontrols and indicators are functionallygrouped on the front control panel andinclude: contact position indicator, closingspring status, close and trip button, opera-tion counter, and a breaker “T” handle latch(located at the bottom of the control panel).
The simplified design includes just fivemajor components: vacuum interrupterpole units, stored energy mechanism,push rod assembly, primary disconnectingcontacts, and removable glass polyesterinsulating barriers.
Convenient Inspection
The breaker is withdrawn on removableextension rails and no separate liftingdevice is required. There is no need toremove the breaker from the switchgear.With the breaker withdrawn, both the com-partment and contact erosion indicator,and “T” cutout loading spring indicator canbe visually inspected.
Both stored energy mechanism and con-trol components are conveniently locatedbehind the easily removed front panel.The current transformer barrier is easilyremoved for inspection and access to thecurrent transformers. Auxiliary drawersuse extension rails to provide for easyinspection and fuse replacement.
Easy Maintenance
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakersare easily maintained. The easy accessmechanism and control components canbe conveniently inspected and minormaintenance (such as lubricating themechanism and replacing control compo-nents) is uncomplicated.
A Standardized Line
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakersrepresent a standard line that utilizes com-mon parts. Standardization provides forfewer total parts which, in turn, reducesand simplifies the spare parts inventory.Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers ofthe same ratings are totally interchange-able between structures.
Auxiliary Drawer Compartment Kits forPower Modules, Mini Modules, or BreakerCompartment Kit Value Added Approaches
Parts include:■ Left and right drawout rails.■ Fuse truck assembly including fuse
holder assembly and various fusemountings. (Fuses are not included.)
■ Primary contact assemblies.■ Shutter assembly, standoff insulators, and
cable supports.■ Hardware for all configurations and align-
ments including mounting and alignmentbrackets.
■ Horizontal sectioning barriers.■ Drawings are provided for manufacturing
the back sheet. They also detail the clear-ances and locations of integral parts.
■ Detailed assembly instructions.■ Available for 36 inch wide standard
and 26 inch wide narrow design switch-gear configurations.
Fuse Drawer Kit
UL Recognized
Parts include:■ Left and right drawout rails.■ CPT truck assembly including glass
polyester barriers and secondary fusemountings. (Control power transformersare not included.)
■ Primary and secondary contact assemblies.■ Shutter assembly, standoff insulators, and
cable supports.■ Hardware for all configurations and align-
ments including mounting and alignmentbrackets.
■ Horizontal sectioning barriers.■ Drawings are provided for manufacturing
the back sheet. They also detail the clear-ances and locations of integral parts.
■ Detailed assembly instructions.■ Available for 36 inch wide standard
and 26 inch wide narrow design switch-gear configurations.
Control Power TransformerDrawer Kit
UL Recognized
UL Recognized
Parts include:■ Left and right drawout rails.■ PT truck assembly. (Potential transform-
ers and fuse mountings are not included.)■ Primary and secondary contact assem-
blies, standoff insulators, and cablesupports.
■ Shutter assembly.■ Hardware for cell mountings and
alignment brackets.■ Horizontal sectioning barriers.■ Drawings are provided for manufacturing
the back sheet. They also detail the clear-ances and locations of integral parts.
■ Detailed assembly instructions.■ Available for 36 inch wide standard
and 26 inch wide narrow design switch-gear configurations.
Potential Transformer Drawer Kit
These kits include all major parts used in assembling an auxiliary compartment. Each kit is shipped in asingle carton with detailed instructions and drawings that include important dimensions, clearances andconfigurations. Power Module B-Planes are prepunched to accommodate any auxiliary compartment kit.
Simplified Maintenance through Visual Inspection of Indicators
“T”CutoutIndicator
Easy-to-See Contact Erosion Indicator
The vacuum interrupter direct readingcontact erosion indicator is clearly vis-ible. Only periodic inspection of theerosion indicator is required.
Convenient Loading Spring Indicator
Visual inspection of the “T” cutout load-ing spring indicator insures that whenclosing the breaker, the loading springsare applying proper pressure to thecontacts.
Stored energy mechanism is conven-iently located behind the removable frontpanel. The front mounting of the mecha-nism provides two dead front shieldsbetween the operator and high voltagewhen the circuit breaker is energized.
ContactErosionIndicator
Cutler-Hammer Vacuum Circuit BreakersAre Convenient to Operate, Simpleto Inspect, and Easy to Maintain
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
8 5
User-Friendly Operation
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakercontrols and indicators are functionallygrouped on the front control panel andinclude: contact position indicator, closingspring status, close and trip button, opera-tion counter, and a breaker “T” handle latch(located at the bottom of the control panel).
The simplified design includes just fivemajor components: vacuum interrupterpole units, stored energy mechanism,push rod assembly, primary disconnectingcontacts, and removable glass polyesterinsulating barriers.
Convenient Inspection
The breaker is withdrawn on removableextension rails and no separate liftingdevice is required. There is no need toremove the breaker from the switchgear.With the breaker withdrawn, both the com-partment and contact erosion indicator,and “T” cutout loading spring indicator canbe visually inspected.
Both stored energy mechanism and con-trol components are conveniently locatedbehind the easily removed front panel.The current transformer barrier is easilyremoved for inspection and access to thecurrent transformers. Auxiliary drawersuse extension rails to provide for easyinspection and fuse replacement.
Easy Maintenance
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakersare easily maintained. The easy accessmechanism and control components canbe conveniently inspected and minormaintenance (such as lubricating themechanism and replacing control compo-nents) is uncomplicated.
A Standardized Line
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakersrepresent a standard line that utilizes com-mon parts. Standardization provides forfewer total parts which, in turn, reducesand simplifies the spare parts inventory.Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers ofthe same ratings are totally interchange-able between structures.
Auxiliary Drawer Compartment Kits forPower Modules, Mini Modules, or BreakerCompartment Kit Value Added Approaches
Parts include:■ Left and right drawout rails.■ Fuse truck assembly including fuse
holder assembly and various fusemountings. (Fuses are not included.)
■ Primary contact assemblies.■ Shutter assembly, standoff insulators, and
cable supports.■ Hardware for all configurations and align-
ments including mounting and alignmentbrackets.
■ Horizontal sectioning barriers.■ Drawings are provided for manufacturing
the back sheet. They also detail the clear-ances and locations of integral parts.
■ Detailed assembly instructions.■ Available for 36 inch wide standard
and 26 inch wide narrow design switch-gear configurations.
Fuse Drawer Kit
UL Recognized
Parts include:■ Left and right drawout rails.■ CPT truck assembly including glass
polyester barriers and secondary fusemountings. (Control power transformersare not included.)
■ Primary and secondary contact assemblies.■ Shutter assembly, standoff insulators, and
cable supports.■ Hardware for all configurations and align-
ments including mounting and alignmentbrackets.
■ Horizontal sectioning barriers.■ Drawings are provided for manufacturing
the back sheet. They also detail the clear-ances and locations of integral parts.
■ Detailed assembly instructions.■ Available for 36 inch wide standard
and 26 inch wide narrow design switch-gear configurations.
Control Power TransformerDrawer Kit
UL Recognized
UL Recognized
Parts include:■ Left and right drawout rails.■ PT truck assembly. (Potential transform-
ers and fuse mountings are not included.)■ Primary and secondary contact assem-
blies, standoff insulators, and cablesupports.
■ Shutter assembly.■ Hardware for cell mountings and
alignment brackets.■ Horizontal sectioning barriers.■ Drawings are provided for manufacturing
the back sheet. They also detail the clear-ances and locations of integral parts.
■ Detailed assembly instructions.■ Available for 36 inch wide standard
and 26 inch wide narrow design switch-gear configurations.
Potential Transformer Drawer Kit
These kits include all major parts used in assembling an auxiliary compartment. Each kit is shipped in asingle carton with detailed instructions and drawings that include important dimensions, clearances andconfigurations. Power Module B-Planes are prepunched to accommodate any auxiliary compartment kit.
Simplified Maintenance through Visual Inspection of Indicators
“T”CutoutIndicator
Easy-to-See Contact Erosion Indicator
The vacuum interrupter direct readingcontact erosion indicator is clearly vis-ible. Only periodic inspection of theerosion indicator is required.
Convenient Loading Spring Indicator
Visual inspection of the “T” cutout load-ing spring indicator insures that whenclosing the breaker, the loading springsare applying proper pressure to thecontacts.
Stored energy mechanism is conven-iently located behind the removable frontpanel. The front mounting of the mecha-nism provides two dead front shieldsbetween the operator and high voltagewhen the circuit breaker is energized.
ContactErosionIndicator
Cutler-Hammer Vacuum Circuit BreakersAre Convenient to Operate, Simpleto Inspect, and Easy to Maintain
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
UL Recognized
6
No More than You Want…No Less than You Need
7
A Modular Value-Added Approach to Circuit Protection…Exclusively from Cutler-Hammer
5/15 kVPower ModulesProvide OEMswith aComplete Structure
5/15 kVMini ModulesProvide OEMswith a More Value-Added Approach
5/15 kVCircuit BreakerCompartment KitsProvide OEMswith theOpportunityto Add theMost Value
5/15 kVVacuumCircuit Breakers
36-Inch Standard Design26-Inch Narrow Design
Available Configurations
Both26" Narrowand36" StandardDesign
36" StandardDesign Only
➀Breaker Compartment➁Blank Auxiliary
Power Module Ampere Ratings
26" Narrow Design 1200A
36" Standard Design 1200A, 2000A, 3000A
* Refer to page 11 for specific breaker ratings. UL listing, 3-cycle ratings, undervoltage release, and second shunt trip are optionally available.
Type VCPW-ND Type VCPW-SEType VCP-W / VCP-WC
Power modules are ideal for OEMs whosupply standard through complex switch-gear. The OEM provides value-added itemssuch as doors, bus, cable area compart-ments, instruments, relays and associatedwiring. The power module incorporatesindividual vertical sections which will en-close a maximum of two Type VCP-WCircuit Breakers or four auxiliary drawersor a combination of one Type VCP-WCircuit Breaker and two auxiliary drawers.
■ A complete structure including fullyequipped circuit breaker and blank aux-iliary compartment, control compartment,and main bus compartment…plus sideand back sheets, roof assembly, doorhinges/stops, and ventilation chimney.
■ 36 inch wide design availablein 10 configurations.
■ 26 inch wide narrow design availablein four configurations.
■ The breaker can be inserted in theupper or lower compartment.
■ Two auxiliary drawers (for PTs, CPT,or fuses) can be located in the upperor lower blank auxiliary compartment.
■ Auxiliary compartment kits can beeasily installed into any blank auxiliarypower module compartment to suitany PT, CPT, or fuse drawer.
■ All blank auxiliary B-Planes areprepunched to accept a PT, CPT,or fuse drawer kit.
■ Exclusive 3,000 ampere breaker in theupper compartment with a single aux-iliary drawer in the lower compartment.
■ 4000 ampere forced air cooled powermodules are also available.
■ Available with glass polyester orporcelain insulating tubes for either41 kA, 50 kA, or 63 kA applications.
A simple building block approach in whichthe OEM provides value-added items suchas doors, bus, cable area compartment,side sheets, instruments, relays, and as-sociated wiring. Easily configured to suitmany applications. Mini modules are avail-able as:
■ 1200, 2000, or 3000 ampere breakercompartment designs.
■ Different bus terminal configurationsavailable for upper or lower com-partments.
■ Boxed frame, levering-in assembly,glass polyester or porcelain insulatingtubes for either 41 kA, 50 kA, or 63 kAapplications, current transformer barrier,and shutter assembly.
Mini Module Ampere Ratings
26" Narrow Design 1200A
36" Standard Design 1200A, 2000A, 3000A
Compartment Kit Specifications
Ampere Primary Disconnect StabRating Supports Arrangements
26" Narrow Design
1200A Glass Polyester Line and Load
36" Standard Design
1200A Glass Polyester Line and Load or Line/Lineor Porcelain Line and Load or Line/Line
2000A Glass Polyester Line and Load or Line/Lineor Porcelain Line and Load or Line/Line
3000A Glass Polyester Line and Loador Porcelain Line and Load
Circuit breaker compartment kits provide amaximum value-added approach to buildingswitchgear, combining maximum designflexibility with cost competitiveness. Eachcircuit breaker compartment kit includes:
■ Slot and tab design that assures allcritical breaker/structure interfaces aremaintained, eliminating the potentialdistortion problems that can occurwith conventional weld/bend designs.
■ Breaker levering-in assembly withleft and right drawer drawout rails.
■ Primary disconnect supports(upper and lower).
■ Current transformer barrier assembly.■ Shutter assembly.■ Glass polyester or porcelain insulating
tubes for either 41 kA, 50 kA,or 63 kA applications.
■ Drawings that include dimensionsand clearances are provided. B-Planesheets are provided by the OEM tomaximize a staged production process.
Type VCPW-NDMedium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker
The Type VCPW-ND Circuit Breaker offersproven industry leading vacuum circuitbreaker technology in a 26 inch wideswitchgear design, making it ideal for usewhen the benefits of a vacuum breaker arerequired and installation space is limited.The breaker is ANSI rated at 5 kV and IECrated at 3.6/7.2 kV.*
Type VCP-W / VCP-WC / VCP-WGMedium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker
As with all Cutler-Hammer vacuum circuitbreakers, reliability of the standard designType VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker hasbeen proven by over 25 years of vacuumcircuit breaker design and manufacturingexperience. The breaker is designed for36 inch wide switchgear and is ANSI ratedat 5/15 kV and IEC rated at 3.6/17.5 kV.*
Type VCPW-SEMedium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker
The Type VCPW-SE Vacuum CircuitBreaker is designed for 36 inch wideswitchgear applications and includescycloaliphatic epoxy insulation and crosslinked polyolefin insulated control wire,making it ideal for use in harsh industrialenvironments. The breaker is ANSI ratedat 5/15 kV, and IEC rated at 3.6/17.5 kV.*
UL Recognized
UL Recognized
Listed option is availableInterrupterStem
ContactSegments
1200 1200 ➁ ➁Amp Amp➀ ➀ ➁ ➁
1200 ➁ 1200 ➁Amp Amp➀ ➁ ➀ ➁
1200 2000 2000 ➁Amp Amp Amp➀ ➀ ➀ ➁
2000 1200 ➁ 2000Amp Amp Amp➀ ➀ ➁ ➀
3000Blank Amp
➀
Blank3000Amp➀ ➁
Type VCP-WG
Cutler-Hammer Products Cutler-Hammer 5/15 kV Medium Voltage Switchgear Components
UL Recognized
6
No More than You Want…No Less than You Need
7
A Modular Value-Added Approach to Circuit Protection…Exclusively from Cutler-Hammer
5/15 kVPower ModulesProvide OEMswith aComplete Structure
5/15 kVMini ModulesProvide OEMswith a More Value-Added Approach
5/15 kVCircuit BreakerCompartment KitsProvide OEMswith theOpportunityto Add theMost Value
5/15 kVVacuumCircuit Breakers
36-Inch Standard Design26-Inch Narrow Design
Available Configurations
Both26" Narrowand36" StandardDesign
36" StandardDesign Only
➀Breaker Compartment➁Blank Auxiliary
Power Module Ampere Ratings
26" Narrow Design 1200A
36" Standard Design 1200A, 2000A, 3000A
* Refer to page 11 for specific breaker ratings. UL listing, 3-cycle ratings, undervoltage release, and second shunt trip are optionally available.
Type VCPW-ND Type VCPW-SEType VCP-W / VCP-WC
Power modules are ideal for OEMs whosupply standard through complex switch-gear. The OEM provides value-added itemssuch as doors, bus, cable area compart-ments, instruments, relays and associatedwiring. The power module incorporatesindividual vertical sections which will en-close a maximum of two Type VCP-WCircuit Breakers or four auxiliary drawersor a combination of one Type VCP-WCircuit Breaker and two auxiliary drawers.
■ A complete structure including fullyequipped circuit breaker and blank aux-iliary compartment, control compartment,and main bus compartment…plus sideand back sheets, roof assembly, doorhinges/stops, and ventilation chimney.
■ 36 inch wide design availablein 10 configurations.
■ 26 inch wide narrow design availablein four configurations.
■ The breaker can be inserted in theupper or lower compartment.
■ Two auxiliary drawers (for PTs, CPT,or fuses) can be located in the upperor lower blank auxiliary compartment.
■ Auxiliary compartment kits can beeasily installed into any blank auxiliarypower module compartment to suitany PT, CPT, or fuse drawer.
■ All blank auxiliary B-Planes areprepunched to accept a PT, CPT,or fuse drawer kit.
■ Exclusive 3,000 ampere breaker in theupper compartment with a single aux-iliary drawer in the lower compartment.
■ 4000 ampere forced air cooled powermodules are also available.
■ Available with glass polyester orporcelain insulating tubes for either41 kA, 50 kA, or 63 kA applications.
A simple building block approach in whichthe OEM provides value-added items suchas doors, bus, cable area compartment,side sheets, instruments, relays, and as-sociated wiring. Easily configured to suitmany applications. Mini modules are avail-able as:
■ 1200, 2000, or 3000 ampere breakercompartment designs.
■ Different bus terminal configurationsavailable for upper or lower com-partments.
■ Boxed frame, levering-in assembly,glass polyester or porcelain insulatingtubes for either 41 kA, 50 kA, or 63 kAapplications, current transformer barrier,and shutter assembly.
Mini Module Ampere Ratings
26" Narrow Design 1200A
36" Standard Design 1200A, 2000A, 3000A
Compartment Kit Specifications
Ampere Primary Disconnect StabRating Supports Arrangements
26" Narrow Design
1200A Glass Polyester Line and Load
36" Standard Design
1200A Glass Polyester Line and Load or Line/Lineor Porcelain Line and Load or Line/Line
2000A Glass Polyester Line and Load or Line/Lineor Porcelain Line and Load or Line/Line
3000A Glass Polyester Line and Loador Porcelain Line and Load
Circuit breaker compartment kits provide amaximum value-added approach to buildingswitchgear, combining maximum designflexibility with cost competitiveness. Eachcircuit breaker compartment kit includes:
■ Slot and tab design that assures allcritical breaker/structure interfaces aremaintained, eliminating the potentialdistortion problems that can occurwith conventional weld/bend designs.
■ Breaker levering-in assembly withleft and right drawer drawout rails.
■ Primary disconnect supports(upper and lower).
■ Current transformer barrier assembly.■ Shutter assembly.■ Glass polyester or porcelain insulating
tubes for either 41 kA, 50 kA,or 63 kA applications.
■ Drawings that include dimensionsand clearances are provided. B-Planesheets are provided by the OEM tomaximize a staged production process.
Type VCPW-NDMedium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker
The Type VCPW-ND Circuit Breaker offersproven industry leading vacuum circuitbreaker technology in a 26 inch wideswitchgear design, making it ideal for usewhen the benefits of a vacuum breaker arerequired and installation space is limited.The breaker is ANSI rated at 5 kV and IECrated at 3.6/7.2 kV.*
Type VCP-W / VCP-WC / VCP-WGMedium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker
As with all Cutler-Hammer vacuum circuitbreakers, reliability of the standard designType VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker hasbeen proven by over 25 years of vacuumcircuit breaker design and manufacturingexperience. The breaker is designed for36 inch wide switchgear and is ANSI ratedat 5/15 kV and IEC rated at 3.6/17.5 kV.*
Type VCPW-SEMedium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker
The Type VCPW-SE Vacuum CircuitBreaker is designed for 36 inch wideswitchgear applications and includescycloaliphatic epoxy insulation and crosslinked polyolefin insulated control wire,making it ideal for use in harsh industrialenvironments. The breaker is ANSI ratedat 5/15 kV, and IEC rated at 3.6/17.5 kV.*
UL Recognized
UL Recognized
Listed option is availableInterrupterStem
ContactSegments
1200 1200 ➁ ➁Amp Amp➀ ➀ ➁ ➁
1200 ➁ 1200 ➁Amp Amp➀ ➁ ➀ ➁
1200 2000 2000 ➁Amp Amp Amp➀ ➀ ➀ ➁
2000 1200 ➁ 2000Amp Amp Amp➀ ➀ ➁ ➀
3000Blank Amp
➀
Blank3000Amp➀ ➁
Type VCP-WG
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit BreakersANSI 5/15 kV at 1200-3000 Amperes
250-1500 MVA, 60-95 kV BILIEC 3.6/17.5 kV at 630-2000 Amperes
25-40 kA, 40-95 kV BIL
The leading value-added modularapproach for assembling metal-cladswitchgear featuring Cutler-Hammermedium voltage vacuum circuitbreakers, structures and accessories.
The World’s Most CompleteLine of Medium VoltageVacuum Circuit Breakers
Breaker Type Voltage Class Insulation BIL Interrupting Ratings Continuous Current Application
VCPW-ND ANSI 5 kV 60 kV 250 MVA 1200A 26" Wide New Metal-Clad Switchgear
IEC 3.6-7.2 kV 40-60 kV 25-31.5 kA 630-1250Aor Upgrades to Existing Airbreak Switchgear
VCP-W ANSI 5-15 kV 60-95 kV 250-1500 MVA 1200-3000A 36" Wide New Metal-Clad Switchgear
IEC 3.6-17.5 kV 40-95 kV 25-40 kA 630-2000Aor Upgrades to Existing Switchgear
VCPW-SE ANSI 5-15 kV 60-95 kV 250-1500 MVA 1200-3000A 36" Wide Special Environment Metal-Clad
IEC 3.6-17.5 kV 40-95 kV 25-40 kA 630-2000ASwitchgear Featuring Breakers with CycloaliphaticEpoxy Insulation for Harsh Industrial Environments
VCP-W ANSI 27 kV 125 kV 16-40 kA 600-2000A 36" Wide Metal-Clad Switchgear
IEC 24 kV 125 kV 16-25 kA 630-2000Aor Upgrades to Existing Switchgear
VCP-W ANSI 38 kV 170 kV 16-40 kA, 600-2500A 42" Wide Metal-Clad Switchgear1500 MVA
VCP-W (Outdoor) ANSI 15.5 kV 110 kV 16-31.5 kA 600-1200A Outdoor Station Distribution Breakers
W-VAC IEC 3.6-17.5 kV 40-95 kV 16-40 kA 630-2000A 600-750 mm Wide IEC Medium Voltage Switchgear
W-VAC IEC 3.6-17.5 kV 40-95 kV 31.5-50 kA 2500-3150A 1000 mm Wide IEC Medium Voltage Switchgear
W-VAC IEC 36 kV 170 kV 16-31.5 kA 630-2000A 42" Wide IEC Metal-Clad Switchgear
DHP-VR ANSI 5-15 kV 60-95 kV 250-1000 MVA 1200-3000A DHP Metal-Clad Switchgear Technology Upgradeswith the DHP-VR Direct Roll-in Vacuum Replace-ment Breakers from the Original Manufacturer
VCP-WR ANSI 5-15 kV 60-95 kV 250-1500 MVA 1200-3000A Modular Fixed Vacuum Circuit Breakers in 18", 20",and 29" Widths for Conversions/Retrofits, MetalEnclosed Switchgear and Mining Switchgear
VCP-WC ANSI 5-17.5kV 95kV 25-63kA 1200-3000A 36" wide Metal-Clad Switchgear
VCP-WG ANSI 5-15kV 95kV 50-63kA 1200-3000A 36" wide Metal-Clad Switchgear
VCP-T ANSI 5-15kV 95kV 16-25kA 800-1200A Smaller frame breaker
VCP-TR IEC 3.6-17.5kV 95kV 16-25kA 630-1250A Smaller frame breaker
Series 18, 20, and 29
MED
IUM
VOL
TAGE
VAC
UUM
CIRC
UIT
BREA
KERS
Eaton CorporationCutler-Hammer business unit1000 Cherrington ParkwayMoon Township, PA 15108United Statestel: 1-800-525-2000www.cutler-hammer.com
© 2003 EATON CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
PRINTED IN USA
FORM NO. BR01301006E
SEPTEMBER 2003
OEMSWITCHGEARCOMPONENTPRODUCTS
[ Circuit breakers ] 1
HVX
Whether you are planning new switchgear installations or upgrading existing ones, you need cost-effective and reliable components thatcan be easily integrated into your equipment.
As a leading switchgear manufacturer, Schneider Electric has theexperience and resources to develop components that meetthe needs of our customers worldwide.
HVX is our latest range of vacuum circuit breakers. It offersa proven state-of-the-art design to meet your specificationsfor power switching devices in air-insulated switchgear upto 36 kV. HVX brings a valuable solution to your project.
A secure investment in the future
We have brought together the combined experience of our worldwide manufacturing sites to design a new circuit breaker for use in our switchgear. The HVX combines our latest technology with time-tested and proven reliable design.
This latest audition to our range of vacuum interrupters reinforces our technological position as vacuum switching market leader. Thanks to theimproved contact design, our interrupters provide unrivalled performancefor their reduced size.
Operating mechanisms have been simplified to increase reliability and give extended life with very low maintenance.
Instead of the traditional spring operating mechanism, HVX decreed a single-shaft system and only one torsion spring, reducing the number of parts and increasing the reliability.
HVX meets the latest requirements of IEC and ANSI standards.
CUSTOMER BENEFITS
• Suitable for new and retrofit projects
• Economical and compact design
• Robust construction for long life
• State-of-the-art vacuum interrupters and
• operating mechanisms
• Minimum maintenance
Vacuum circuit breaker
[ Circuit breakers ] HVX 2
05/2010
Greater flexibilityHVX is available in a range of standard, fixed or withdrawable configurations, with plug-in or bolted connections.
• HVX-F for use in equipment requiring bolted • main connections.
• HVX-E for use in equipment requiring plug-in • circuit breakers on a withdrawable chassis.
• HVX, type B, with open pole part for improved • natural cooling for high currents up to 3,150 A • or short circuit currents up to 50 kA. Type B is • available as fixed version or as withdrawable • version.
• HVX 36 kV with modified pole parts for increased• withstand voltage. Type B is available as fixed • version or as withdrawable version.
Power module PMX
power module, PMX, which incorporates a chassis with metal shutters, earthing switch, mechanical interlocks, multi-functional bushings and various electrical options.
Schneider Electric SA
35 rue Joseph Monier 92500 Rueil Malmaison France Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-1
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Ordering Information
1. Order main and distribution sections from pages 3-7.
60-800.................................................................................................................. p. 360-100............................................................................................................... p. 4-5
60-400............................................................................................................... p. 6-7
2. Order main device from pages 8-10
60-800.................................................................................................................. p. 860-100.................................................................................................................. p. 960-400................................................................................................................p. 10
3. Order branch device from pages 12-16
Multi-pole MCCBs .......................................................................................... p.12-13Single-pole MCCBs.............................................................................................p. 14QMQB Switches.................................................................................................. p. 14
MQS Sub-metering .............................................................................................p. 14NB Breakers........................................................................................................p. 16
4. Order metering device from p. 17
5. Order accessories from p. 19
60-800Single Section, 600V, 1200A max. (MCCB)
800A max. (QMQB)
60-400Multisection, 600V, 6000A max.
Service Entrance
Switchboard
Main Device
Distribution Device
Max. Voltage
Max. Amperage
Page No.
60-800 MCCB QMQB
MCCB QMQB 600V 1200A K-3
60-100 MCCB QMQB
MCCB QMQB Sub-Metering
600V 1200A K-4
60-400
MCCB Masterpact
Bolt-Loc Power-Lok
MCCB QMQBSub-Metering
600V 6000A K-6
60-100Multisection, 600V, 1200A max.
Switchboards
K-2 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Service Entrance SwitchboardsService Entrance Switchboards typically comprise three basic units: the Main device unit or cell, the utility compartment and the distribution section(s). Federal Pioneer offers a line of pre-engineered switchboards with main device ratings up to 6000A manufactured in accordance with CSA spec. C22.2 No. 31.
Application
• Federal Pioneer switchboards are designed for use in small and medium industrial and commercial building installations. Standard configurations, as described in the following pages, are ideally suited for these applications. Custom built designs are also available for special applications.
Main Device Compartment
• This section of the switchboard houses the main circuit breaker or fusible discon-nect. Optional ground fault protection is available with the main device in most cases.
Utility CT and PT compartment
• The utility compartment contains the connectors and hardware needed for field-installation of the utility metering potential and current transformers. The universal design of this compartment allows mounting of both bar-type or windows-type CT's. However, windows type CT’s are included as standard on 60-400 unless other-wise specified.
Distribution Section
• The distribution section houses the feeder devices. Federal Pioneer offers three types of feeder modules:
• the breaker module accepts MCCB's only
• the QMQB module accepts fusible disconnects
• sub-metering modules accept MQS units up to 200A.
Cable Entry
• A variety of cable entry options are available to accommodate most methods of cable entry. These include cabling directly to the main device, full length wireways, rear-entry bus stubs and other specific local utility requirements.
Auxiliary Metering and Protection
• Customer metering and indication, ground fault and other additional protection are available options with most types of switchboards.
Bus Bars
• Federal Pioneer offers tin plated aluminum bus as a standard with optional copper bus.
Shipping Splits
• The standard shipping split is a single cell configuration for units ordered from the modular selection chart. The main cell with wireway is considered as one section in this case.
Symbols
• Listed below are the symbols used in the module selection process.
Fixed Mounted Circuit Breaker
Fusible Switch (Provision for Fuses)
Utility Transformer Section
Provision for Cable Entry(arrow points in direction cable is from)
Bus Stub
Electrical Connections
Horizontal Bus at Top, bottom, Centre
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-3
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
60-800 Series(Maximum 600 Volts, 1200 Amps)
Features
• 1200A maximum bus design
• Aluminum bus with tin plating standard; copper bus optional
• Main devices are MCCB (400-1200A) and QMQB (400-800A)
• 42 "X" feeder device space available (28 7/8").
• NB type branch breakers available
• Split neutral design makes distribution wiring easier
• Continuous ground bus
• Galvanized steel construction. Front covers painted ASA61 grey
• CSA Type 1 Enclosure Standard
• Floor mounted, wall supported
• Single section main, distribution and utility service
• Compact 12" depth
• CSA C22.2, No. 31 approved
Note: See page K-8 for main devices.
60-800 Main Cell(Prices Do Not Include Main
Device)
Box Diagram
Single Line Diagram
Main Device Amps Top Bottom Right Left
MCCB
400Catalogue No. 60800-6A-T 60800-6A-B 60800-6A-WJLR 60800-6A-WJLL
List Price ‡
600Catalogue No. 60800-6A-T 60800-6A-B 60800-6A-WJMR 60800-6A-WJML
List Price ‡
800Catalogue No. 60800-6A-T 60800-6A-B 60800-6A-WCMHR 60800-6A-WCMHL
List Price ‡
1000Catalogue No. 60800-6A-T 60800-6A-B 60800-6A-WCMHR 60800-6A-WCMHL
List Price ‡
1200Catalogue No. — — 60812-6A-WCKR 60812-6A-WCKL
List Price ‡
Fusible400, 600
Catalogue No. 60800-6A-T 60800-6A-B 60800-6A-WQ6R 60800-6A-WQ6L
List Price ‡
800Catalogue No. 60800-6A-T 60800-6A-B 60800-6A-WQ8R 60800-6A-WQ8L
List Price ‡
Branch Device Max Branch Unit Available Branch HeightMCCB 1000A 42X
Fusible Switches 400A 42X
Distribution Section1. Branch devices 225A and less may exit through the top, bottom or sides. Branch
devices 400-1000A may exit through the end opposite to the CT compartment bar-rier.
2. Select branch devices from pages K-11 to 15.
Switchboards
K-4 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
60-100 Series(Maximum 600 Volts, 1200 Amps)
Features
• 1200A maximum bus design
• Aluminum bus with tin plating standard; copper bus optional
• Main devices are MCCB circuit breakers or QMQB fusible load break switches
• NB type branch breakers available
• Sub-metering branch devices available up to 200A
• Free standing, cable fed distribution section available
• Capable of bus duct entry or exit
• Galvanized steel construction with ASA 61 grey steel front covers
• CSA Type 1 Enclosure Standard
• Floor mounted, free standing
• Front accessible
• CSA C22.2, No. 31 approved
Notes:
1. See page K-9 for main devices.
2. Wireway bottom entry only.
3. Stand alone main cell requires wireway for exit.
60-100Main Section (Prices Do Not Include
Main Device)
Box Diagram
Top Entry Bus Stub Right Wireway Left WirewayRight Busless
WirewayLeft Busless
Wireway
Single Line Diagram
Main Device Amps List Price ‡
MCCB
400A600A800A
1000A1200A
QMQB
400A600A
800A1000A1200A
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-5
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Dimensional Information
60-100 Main Cell
Busless wireway width (ww) is 16”, bussed wireway width (ww)is 24”.
Notes:
1. For 6” wall, X = 5”; 8” wall, X = 9.5”; 12” wall, X = 13.5”.If other than standard is required, please consult factory.
2. Y dimension and hole patterns as per local hydro requirements.
Bus Stub (Back View)
60-100 Distribution Cell
Notes:
1. Wireway dimensions are 16”W x 16”D x 90”H.
2. Select branch breakers from pages K-12 to 16.
Distribution Cell Dimensions
Note:
1. Some utilities may limit available MQS height to 70X.
60-100 DistributionSingle Line
Diagram
To line up with main
Free Standing DistributionDistribution Wireway 1
Branch Device Amps List Price ‡
MCCBFusible Switches
Sub-metering MQS
400A600A
800A1000A1200A
Branch Device
Width (W) Device TypesAvailable
Device Height
MCCB38” FK, CE, CJL, CJM, CMH,
TH1, TH4 96X CK, TH842”
Fusible38” 30-600A QMQB
98X42” 800A QMQB
Sub-Metering MQS
45” 30-200A MQS 98X1
Switchboards
K-6 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
60-400 Series(Maximum 600 volts, 6000 Amps)
Features
• 6000A maximum bus design
• Aluminum bus with tin plating standard; copper bus optional
• Main devices include Masterpact Circuit Breaker, MCCB’s or Power-Lok/Bolt-Lok switches
• NB type branch breakers available
• Sub-metering distribution available to 200A
• Free standing, cable fed distribution section available
• Bottom Entry Mains available w/o wireway (except w/Power-Lok Main)
• Capable of bus duct entry
• Exterior finish painted ASA 61 grey
• CSA Type 1 indoor enclosure standard
• Floor mounted, free standing
• Channel base supplied as standard
• A wide variety of options are available to meet customer requirements
• CSA C22.2, No. 31 approved
Notes:
1. 4000, 5000A and 6000A available in copper bus only.
2. See page K-10 for main devices.
3. Wireway required for bottom entry if using Power-Lok Fusible main.
4. Stand-alone main cell requires wireway for exit.
60-400Main Section
(Prices Do Not Include Main Device)Top entry Bottom Entry Bus Stub Right Wireway Left Wireway
Main Devices Amps List Price ‡
Breakers
1600A2000A2500A
3000A4000A5000A Consult Factory
Fusible
1600A2000A2500A
3000A4000A3
5000A3 Consult Factory
6000A Consult Factory
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-7
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
60-400 Main Cell
Dimensional Information Main Cell Dimensions (in)
Amps Main Device W D ww
1600CPH, PE, PX
36 24 24Bolt Loc
2000CPH, PE, PX
Bolt Loc
2500PE, PX 36
24 36Bolt Loc 42
3000Masterpact
42 36 36Bolt Loc
4000Masterpact
48 48 36Power Lok
5000 Masterpact 48 54/60 42
6000 Masterpact 54 60 42
Height includes channel base Bus Stub (Back View)
Notes:
1. For 6”, X = 7.25; 8” wall, X = 9.25”; 12” wall, X = 13.25”. If other than standard is required, please consult factory.
2. Y dimensions and hole pattern as per local hydro requirements.
3. Z = Main cell width - 2.5”.
60-400 Distribution Cell
Notes:
1. 4000A/5000A/6000A Copper Bus Only.
2. Wireway required for free-standing distribution.Consult factory if deeper cell is more suitable than wireway.
3. Select branch breakers from pages K-12 to 16.
Distribution Cell Dimensions
Notes:
1. Using a 1200A QMQB in the distribution section takes up additional X space. If top exit, remaining space is 52X. If bottom exit, remaining space is 34X. Only one 1200A QMQB per distribution section.
2. Some utilities may limit available MQS height to 70X.
60-400 Distribution
Single Line Diagram
To line up with main Wireway Adder2
Branch Device Main Bus Amps List Price
MCCBFusible Switches
Sub-metering MQS
1600A2000A
2500A3000A4000A1
5000A1 Consult Factory6000A Consult Factory
Branch Device Device TypesWidth(W)
Depth(D)
Available Device Height
MCCBFK, CE, CJL, CMH, TH1,
TH4, TH8, CK42"
24"104X36"
48"
Fusible Switches
30-1200A QMQB
42"24"
106X36"48"
MQS 30-200A MQS 48"
24"98X236"
48"
Switchboards
K-8 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
1
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Note:
1. CJL and CJM breakers have optional electronic trips,see pages 11-12 for prices.
Fusible Switches
Note:
1. For fuses see Section E.
60-800 Main Devices
Amps Trip Unit Catalogue Number List Price ‡
400
Thermal-Magnetic CJL3400EThermal-Magnetic CJL3400N
Thermal-Magnetic CJL3400HThermal-Magnetic CMH36400
Electronic CK3400E-4SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400E-4UT
100% Electronic CK3400EE-4S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400EE-4UT
Electronic CK3400N-4S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400N-4UT100% Electronic CK3400NN-4S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400NN-4UT
Electronic CK3400H-4SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400H-4UT100% Electronic CK3400HH-4S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400HH-4UT
600
Thermal-Magnetic CMH36600Thermal-Magnetic CJM3600EThermal-Magnetic CJM3600N
Thermal-Magnetic CJM3600HElectronic CK3600E-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600E-8UT
100% Electronic CK3600EE-8S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600EE-8UT
Electronic CK3600N-8SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600N-8UT
100% Electronic CK3600NN-8S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600NN-8UT
Electronic CK3600H-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600H-8UT100% Electronic CK3600HH-8S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600HH-8UT
800
Thermal-Magnetic CMH36800Electronic Trip CK3800E-8SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800E-8UT100% Electronic CK3800EE-8S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800EE-8UTElectronic CK3800N-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800N-8UT
100% Electronic CK3800NN-8S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800NN-8UT
Electronic CK3800H-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800H-8UT100% Electronic CK3800HH-8S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800HH-8UT
1000
Thermal-Magnetic CMH361000
Electronic CK31000E-12SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000E-12UT
Electronic CK31000N-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000N-12UTElectronic CK31000H-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000H-12UT
Amps Trip Unit Catalogue Number List Price ‡
1200
Electronic CK31200E-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200E-12UTElectronic CK31200N-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200N-12UTElectronic CK31200H-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200H-12UT
Amps Type Catalogue Number List Price ‡
400QMQB
QMQB4836B600 QMQB7036B800 QMQB8836B
CJL
CMH
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-9
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Fusible Switches
Note:
1. For fuses see Section E.
60-100 Main Devices
Amps Trip Unit Catalogue Number List Price ‡
400
Thermal-Magnetic CMH36400Thermal-Magnetic CJM3400E
Thermal-Magnetic CJM3400NThermal-Magnetic CJM3400H
Electronic CK3400E-4SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400E-4UT
100% Electronic CK3400EE-4S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400EE-4UT
Electronic Trip CK3400N-4S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400N-4UT100% Electronic CK3400NN-4S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400NN-4UT
Electronic CK3400H-4SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400H-4UT100% Electronic CK3400HH-4S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3400HH-4UT
600
Thermal-Magnetic CMH36600Thermal-Magnetic CJM3600EThermal-Magnetic CJM3600N
Thermal-Magnetic CJM3600HElectronic CK3600E-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600E-8UT
100% Electronic CK3600EE-8S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600EE-8UT
Electronic CK3600N-8SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600N-8UT
100% Electronic CK3600NN-8S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600NN-8UT
Electronic CK3600H-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600H-8UT100% Electronic Trip CK3600HH-8S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3600HH-8UT
800
Thermal-Magnetic CMH36800Electronic CK3800E-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800E-8UT100% Electronic CK3800EE-8S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800EE-8UTElectronic CK3800N-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800N-8UT
100% Electronic CK3800NN-8S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800NN-8UT
Electronic CK3800H-8S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800H-8UT100% Electronic CK3800HH-8S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK3800HH-8UT
1000
Thermal-Magnetic CMH361000
Electronic CK31000E-12SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000E-12UT100% Electronic CK31000EE-12S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000EE-12UTElectronic CK31000N-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000N-12UT
100% Electronic CK31000NN-12S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000NN-12UT
Electronic CK31000H-12SElec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000H-12UT
100% Electronic CK31000HH-12S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31000HH-12UT
Amps Type Catalogue Number List Price ‡
1200
Thermal-Magnetic CPH2036Electronic PXF361200
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PXF361200G100% Electronic PEF361200LI
100 % Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PEF361200LIG100% Electronic PEF361200LS
100 % Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PEF361200LSGElectronic CK31200E-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200E-12UT
100% Electronic CK31200EE-12S100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200EE-12UT
Electronic CK31200N-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200N-12UT100% Electronic CK31200NN-12S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200NN-12UTElectronic CK31200H-12S
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200H-12UT100% Electronic CK31200HH-12S
100% Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. CK31200HH-12UT
Amps Type Catalogue Number List Price‡400
QMQB
QMQB4836B
600 QMQB7036B800 QMQB8836B1200 QMQB9836B
1200 QMQB w/ Gr. Flt. —
CMH
CK
Switchboards
K-10 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Interrupting Capacity
Note:
1. Bolt-Loc and Power-Lok interrupting capacities are 200 kA when used with fuses.
2. Consult Schneider Canada for unfused I.C. ratings.
Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
Note:
1. Electronic Trip, 100% rated, includes ground-fault protection.
Fusible Switches
60-400 Main Devices
Amps Trip Unit Catalogue Number List Price ‡
1600
Thermal-Magnetic CPH2036Electronic PXF361600
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PXF361600G100% Electronic PEF361600LI
100 % Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PEF361600LIG100% Electronic PEF361600LS
100 % Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PEF361600LSG
2000
Thermal-Magnetic CPH2036Electronic PXF362000
Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PXF362000G100% Electronic PEF362000LI
100 % Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PEF362000LIG
100% Electronic PEF362000LS100 % Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PEF362000LSG
2500
Electronic PXF362500Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PXF362500G
100% Electronic PEF362500LI100 % Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PEF362500LIG
100% Electronic PEF362500LS
100 % Elec. w/ Gr. Flt. PEF362500LSG
Amperes Main Device Interrupting Capacity (kA) @600 Vac
1600
CPH 65PE 65
PX 65Masterpact 65
Bolt-Loc 200
2000
CPH 65
PE 65PX 65
Masterpact 75
Bolt-Loc 200
2500PE 65PX 65
Bolt-Loc 200
3000MasterPact 75
Bolt-Loc 200
4000MasterPact 75
Power-Lok 2005000 MasterPact 100
Amps Type Cat. No. List Price ‡1600
Masterpact
M16H12000 M20H1
3000 M30H14000 MP40H15000 MP50H16000 MP60H1
Amps Type List Price ‡
1600Bolt-Loc
Bolt-Loc w/ Gr. Flt.
2000Bolt-Loc
Bolt-Loc w/ Gr. Flt.
2500Bolt-Loc
Bolt-Loc w/ Gr. Flt.
3000Bolt-Loc
Bolt-Loc w/ Gr. Flt.
4000Power-Lok
Power-Lok w/ Gr. Flt.
PX
Masterpact
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-11
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
For CJL, CJM, CMH and CK accessories, see section I.
(1200A QMQB Only)
t
Accessory List Price ‡
Alarm SwitchAuxiliary Switch
1A/1B2A/2B3A/3B
Local AmmeterLocal Trip Indicator
Key InterlockNeutral Current Transformer (except CPH)
Shunt TripTime Delay Unit
Undervoltage Release
Accessory List Price ‡Shunt Trip
Main Device Accessories
CPH, PE, PX
QMQB
Accessory List Price ‡Shunt Trip
Undervoltage ReleaseTime Delay UnitZone InterlockDoor Interlock
Key Interlock
Accessories List Price ‡Blown Fuse Detector
Key Interlock
MasterPact
Power-Lok and Bolt-Loc
Switchboards
K-12 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
N
Notes:
1. CJL and CJM are available with optional electronic trips (with suffix -T, -TA, -TG, -TAG, see section I for more information) .
2. Above prices include mounting hardware and installation.
3. For replacement branch breaker and mounting hardware prices, see Section I.
Type Amps PolesInterrupting Capacity
Mounting Branch Height List Price ‡ 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc
FKD 100-250A2
25 kA - - - DOUBLE 3X3
FKG 100-250A2
65 kA - - - DOUBLE 3X3
CE..E4
15-60A2 18 kA 14 kA - 10 kA DOUBLE 2X
70-100A15-60A
3 18 kA 14 kA - 10 kA DOUBLE 3X70-100A
CE..B
15-60A
2 18 kA 14 kA 14 kA 10 kA DOUBLE 2X70-100A
125-150A175-225A
15-60A
3 18 kA 14 kA 14 kA 10 kA DOUBLE 3X70-100A
125-150A175-225A
CE..E
15-60A
2 65 kA 25 kA 18 kA 10 kA DOUBLE 2X70-100A
125-150A175-225A
15-60A
3 65 kA 25 kA 18 kA 10 kA DOUBLE 3X70-100A
125-150A175-225A
CE..N
15-60A
2 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 22 kA DOUBLE 2X70-100A
125-150A175-225A
15-60A
3 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 22 kA DOUBLE 3X70-100A
125-150A175-225A
CE..H
15-60A
2 200 kA 100 kA 35 kA 22 kA DOUBLE 2X70-100A
125-150A175-225A
15-60A
3 200 kA 100 kA 35 kA 22 kA DOUBLE 3X70-100A
125-150A175-225A
CJL250E
100-250A 3 65 kA 35 kA 25 kA 10 kA DOUBLE 4XCJL250E-T
CJL250E-TACJL250E-TG
CJL250E-TAGCJL250N
100-250A 3 100 kA 65 kA 35 kA 22 kA DOUBLE 4XCJL250N-TCJL250N-TACJL250N-TGCJL250N-TAG
CJL250H
100-250A 3 200 kA 100 kA 50 kA 22 kA DOUBLE 4XCJL250H-TCJL250H-TACJL250H-TGCJL250H-TAG
Switchboard Branch Devices, Multi-pole MCCB's
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-13
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
N
Notes:
1. CK breakers have electronic trips only.
2. CJL and CJM are available with optional electronic trips (with suffix -T, -TA, -TG, -TAG, see section I for more information) .
3. For 100% rated CK breakers, add 15% to breaker price list. (800A max)
4. Above prices include mounting hardware and installation.
5. For replacement branch breaker and mounting hardware prices, see Section I.
Type Amps PolesInterrupting Capacity
Mounting Branch Height List Price ‡ 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc
CJL400E
300-400A 3 65 kA 35 kA 25 kA 10 kA DOUBLE 4XCJL400E-T
CJL400E-TA
CJL400E-TGCJL400E-TAG
CJL400N
300-400A 3 100 kA 65 kA 35 kA 22 kA DOUBLE 4XCJL400N-T
CJL400N-TACJL400N-TG
CJL400N-TAGCJL400H
300-400A 3 200 kA 100 kA 50 kA 22 kA DOUBLE 4XCJL400H-T
CJL400H-TA
CJL400H-TGCJL400H-TAG
CJM..E
300-600A 3 65 kA 35 kA 25 kA 10 kA SINGLE 12XCJM..E-T
CJM..E-TACJM..E-TG
CJM..E-TAGCJM..N
300-600A 3 100 kA 65 kA 35 kA 22 kA SINGLE 12XCJM..N-TCJM..N-TA
CJM..N-TGCJM..N-TAG
CJM..H
300-600A 3 200kA 100kA 50kA 22 kA SINGLE 12XCJM..H-TCJM..H-TACJM..H-TG
CJM..H-TAG
CMH300-600A
3 65 kA 65 kA 25 kA 14 kA SINGLE 16X700-800A900-1000A
CK400E200-400A 3
42 kA 35 kA 25 kA - SINGLE 12XCK400N 65 kA 50 kA 35 kA
CK400H 100 kA 65 kA 42 kA
CK800E400-800A 3
42 kA 35 kA 25 kA - SINGLE 12XCK800N 65 kA 50 kA 35 kA
CK800H 100 kA 65 kA 42 kA
CK1200E600-1200A 3
42 kA 35 kA 25 kA - SINGLE 12XCK1200N 65 kA 50 kA 35 kA
CK1200H 100 kA 65 kA 42 kATH1 15-100A 3 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA DOUBLE 6X
TH470-225A
3 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA SINGLE 12X250-400A
TH8300-600A
3 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA SINGLE 12X700-800A
Switchboard Branch Devices, Multi-pole MCCB's (continued)
Switchboards
K-14 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Notes:
1. Above prices include mounting hardware and installation.
2. Twin pole breaker has one common line connection and two separate load connections.
Notes:
1. Utility meter not included.
2. T-fuse kit available for 100A and 200A only.
Poles Lug SizeInterrupting Capacity
Catalogue No. Type List Price ‡347 Vac 277 Vac 120/240 Vac
1
(1) #14 - #6 Cu/Al
14 kA 14kA 42 kA HEW0015 Std. Single14 kA 14 kA 42 kA HEW0020 Std. Single
14 kA 14 kA 42 kA HEW1515 Twin2
14 kA 14 kA 42 kA HEW2020 Twin2
25 kA 65 kA 100 kA HEZ0015 Std. Single
25 kA 65 kA 100 kA HEZ0020 Std. Single25 kA 65 kA 100 kA HEZ1515 Twin2
25 kA 65 kA 100 kA HEZ2020 Twin2
(1) #14 - 1/0 Cu/Al
18 kA 25 kA 25 kA CE1015E Std. Single18 kA 25 kA 25 kA CE1020E Std. Single18 kA 25 kA 25 kA CE1030E Std. Single
25 kA 65 kA 65 kA CE1015N Std. Single25 kA 65 kA 65 kA CE1020N Std. Single25 kA 65 kA 65 kA CE1030N Std. Single
Max. Volts Amps Catalogue Number Maximum Wire Size Branch Height Fuse Type Poles List Price ‡
600 Vac250 Vdc
30-30 QMQB3336B (1) #6 Cu/Al8X J, T3
3
60-60 QMQB6636B (1) #2 Cu/Al100-100 QMQB1136B (1) 1/0 Cu/Al
200 QMQB2036B (1) 250 MCM Cu/Al 14XH, R, J, T400 QMQB4836B (1) 750 MCM or (2) 500 MCM or
(3) 300 MCM or (4) 3/0 Cu/Al 24X600 QMQB7036B
800 QMQB8836B (2) 750 MCM or (3) 500 MCM Cu/Al 28XL,T1200 QMQB9836B
(4) 750 MCM Cu/Al 54X1200 c/w Shunt Trip QMQB9836BS
Max. Volts Amps Maximum Wire Size Catalogue No. Branch Height Fuse Type Poles List Price ‡
600 Vac250 Vdc
30-30 (1) #6 Cu/Al MQS7-3336B
14X J,T2 360-60 (1) #2 Cu/Al MQS7-6636B
100-100 (1) 1/0 Cu/Al MQS7-1136B
200 (1) 250 MCM Cu/Al MQS7-2036
Switchboard Branch Devices, Single Pole MCCBs
200A (SINGLE)30A : 30A (TWIN)
Switchboard Branch Devices, QMQB Switches
Notes:
1. Above prices include cost of installation. See page D-16 for replacement units.
2. Prices do not include fuses. See Section E for fuse prices.
3 30A-100A units shipped in class J fuse configuration only. T-fuse kit available for 100A only.
4. 200A to 600A units are shipped in class J fuse configuration only. Please specify type of fuse required.
5. 800A and 1200A units are shipped in Class L configuration only. Please specify when Class T fuse is required.
6. 1200A Class T fuse available for 240V system only.
Switchboard Branch Devices, MQS Branch Utility Metering Switches
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-15
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Federal Pioneer Switchboards accept NB type branch circuit breakers. Two methods are available for mounting these breakers into a switchboard distribution section. The first method (interior method) utilizes the same interior as the NBLP or NBDP panelboard. The interior is mounted directly on the switchboard bus. This method restricts the sum of the amperage rating on each phase to 225A (for NBLP) and 400 or 600A (for NBDP). If more amperage per phase is required, there is another me thod available using a module kit. This method (modular method) allows the NB breakers to be mounted directly on the switchboard bus.
• Available in 60-800, 60-100 and 60-400.
• NBLP interior is mounted on switchboard bus.
• Single interiors mount horizontally. Double interiors mount side by side vertically.
• These interiors may be fed either from main breaker(s) or directly from switchboard bus.
• Choose main and branch breakers based on the maximum short circuit capacity of the system (22 kA Max, NBH).
• The sum of the rating of the NB/NBH breakers connected in the NBLP interior must not exceed 225A per phase.
NBLP Interiors (Price includes factory installation)
Notes:
1. If NBLP interior is fed from main breaker, the NB main breaker is mounted within the interior; CE and FK breakers are mounted separately.
2. Choose NB breakers from page K-16.
System No. of Circuits Main BusSingle Interior (MLO 225A) Double Interior (MLO 225A)
Catalog Number X Space List Price ‡ Catalog Number X Space List Price ‡
1P3W24
Aluminum NBLP-3AS
20X
NBLP-3AT
28XCopper NBLP-3CS NBLP-3CT
3P4WAluminum NBLP-4AS NBLP-4AT
Copper NBLP-4CS NBLP-4CT
Switchboard Branch Devices, NB Breakers
Interior Method - 240 Vac, 225A Max.
NBLP Single Interior NBLP Double Interior
Switchboards
K-16 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
• Available in 60-100 and 60-400 only.
• NBDP interior is mounted directly on switchboard bus.
• These interiors may be fed either from main breaker(s) or directly from switchboard bus.
• Choose main and branch breakers based on the maximum short circuit capacity of the system (22 kA Max, NBH).
• The sum of the rating of the NB/NBH breakers connected per phase in the NBDP interior must not exceed 400 / 600A.
NBDP Interiors (Price includes factory installation)
Note: Choose NB breakers from page K-16.
• Available in 60-800, 60-100 and 60-400.
• The NB breakers are connected directly on to the switchboard bus, in lieu of using a NBLP interior.
• The advantage of this method is that the sum of the rating of the NB breakers connected per phase is not restricted to 225A maximum.
• Available in 24 cct. modules only which require 22X spaces per module.
• Maximum NB branch is 100A.
NB Modules (Price includes factory installation)
Note: Choose NB breakers from page K-16.
System No. of Circuits X Space Amps Main Bus Catalogue Number List Price ‡
1P3W
42 48X400A
Al NBDP42S-1B400ASCu NBDP42S-1B400CS
600AAl NBDP42S-1B600ASCu NBDP42S-1B600CS
66 66X400A
Al NBDP66S-1B400AS
Cu NBDP66S-1B400CS
600AAl NBDP66S-1B600ASCu NBDP66S-1B600CS
3P4W
42 48X400A
Al NBDP42S-4B400ASCu NBDP42S-4B400CS
600AAl NBDP42S-4B600ASCu NBDP42S-4B600CS
66 66X
400AAl NBDP66S-4B400ASCu NBDP66S-4B400CS
600AAl NBDP66S-4B600AS
Cu NBDP66S-4B600CS
System No. of Circuits X Space Catalogue Number List Price ‡1Ø3W
24 22X NBLP-MOD3Ø4W
Interior Method - 240 Vac, 600A Max.
Modular Method - 240 Vac Max.
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-17
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Note: 1.15A and 20A 1 pole NB Breakers are switching duty rated.
Notes:
1. 10 kA IC at 120/240V. Overcurrent protection as well as ground fault protection.
2. Comes with remote indication and a 10 mA sensitivity. For the protection of submersible pumps which require 10 mA sensitivity under the Canadian Electrical Code 26-956.
3. Maximum distance to load is 250 feet.
NB 10 kA @ 120 / 240V NBH 22 kA @ 120 / 240VPoles Amps Cat. No. Wire Range List Price ‡ Poles Amps Cat. No. Wire Range List Price ‡
115-201 NB15-20
(1) #14-#2 Cu-Al 115-20 NBH15-20
(1) #14-#2 Cu-Al25-50 NB25-50 30-50 NBH30-50
2
15-20 NB215-20
(1) #14-#2 Cu-Al2
15-20 NBH215-20
(1) #14-#2 Cu-Al30-60 NB230-60 30-60 NBH230-6070 NB270 70 NBH270
90-100 NB2P90-100(1) #4-2/0 Cu/Al
90-100 NBH2P90-100(1) #4-2/0 Cu/Al
125-150 NB2P125-150 125 NBH2P125
3
15-20 NB3P15-20
(1) #14-1/0 Cu/Al 3
15-20 NBH3P15-20
(1) #14-1/0 Cu?Al30-60 NB3P30-60 30-60 NBH3P30-60
70 NB3P70 70 NBH3P70
90-100 NB3P90-100 90-100 NBH3P90-100
Amps Wire Range 1 Pole Cat. No. List Price ‡ 2 Pole Cat. No. List Price ‡15
(1) #14 -#8 Cu/Al
NBGF-15 NBGF-215
20 NBGF-20 NBGF-22030 NBGF-30 NBGF-23040 (1) #14-#6 Cu/Al NBGF-40 NBGF-240
Amps Wire Range 2 Pole Cat. No.2 List ‡
15(1) #14 -#8 Cu/Al
NBGF-215R1020 NBGF-220R1030 NBGF-230R10
40 (1) #14-#6 Cu/Al NBGF-240R10
Amps Wire Range 1 Pole Cat. No. List Price‡ 2 Pole Cat. No. List Price‡
15
(1) #14 -#8 Cu/Al
NBGF-15-33 NBGF-215R33
20 NBGF-20-33 NBGF-220R33
30 NBGF-30-33 NBGF-230R33
40 (1) #14-#6 Cu/Al NBGF-40-33 NBGF-240R33
Switchboard Branch Devices, NB Breakers (cont'd)
NB Breakers
NB Ground Fault Breakers with 5 mA Sensitivity
NB Ground Fault Breakers with 10 mA Sensitivity
NB Ground Fault Breakers with 33mA Sensitivity
Switchboards
K-18 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book 1199
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Poles Amps Cat. No. List Price ‡
260 NB260NA70 NB270NA100 NB2P100NA
3
60 NB3P60NA
70 NB3P70NA100 NB3P100NA
Cat. No. Description Qty. List Price PF-1 Plastic Filler 25
BFAB Aluminum Filler 1HTNA Handle Tie 11LOB 1P Lockoff-Padlocking 10
2LOK 2P Lockoff-Padlocking 103-100LOK 3P Lockoff-Padlocking 10
1LOK 1P Lockoff-Non-Padlocking 10
Non-Automatic NB Switches
NB Breaker Accessories
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-19
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Note:
1. Includes PMD-32 display monitor
PowerLogic
• Disturbance Monitoring
• True RMS Metering
• Over 50 displayed meter values, plus Min/Max displays for those values
• Power Quality Readings including: THD and K-Factor, Crest Factor
• RS-485 Communications standard (rear connected)
• Front panel optical communications port
• Modular, installable, digital and analog I/O
• CM-2150 includes instrumentation, 0.2% accuracy, and data loging
• CM-2250 includes waveform capture, plus CM-2150 features
• CM-2350 includes disturbance monitoring, extended memory, plus CM-2250features
• CM-2450 includes programme logic, plus CM-2350 features
Power Meter
• Compact Design
• Multi-function metering
• Seperate Metering compartment not required
• PM 600 includes 0.25% meter accuracy, voltmeter, ammeter, watt-hour meter, fre-quency, power factor, meter pulse and remote communications
• PM 620 includes peak demand with date/time stamp, demand amps, THD, and neu-tral current, plus PM 600 features
• PM 650 extends the PM family by adding min/max readings, alarm/relay functions, advanced demand capabilities and logging memory for up to 100 meter readings and 10 event log entries. The PM 650 uses the same housing and display as existing Power Meters.
Metering Devices
Meter Switchboard List Price ‡
Power Meter 1
PM 60060-800/60100/60-400
PM 620PM650
CM-2150
60-100/60-400CM-2250CM-2350CM-2450
PowerLogic
Power Meter
Switchboards
1199 ‡For prices refer to List Price Book K-21
KS
wit
ch
bo
ard
s
Switchboard Options
Note: 1. Cu Bus standard on 4000/5000A 60-400
Description Switchboard List Price ‡
Driphood (per cell)60-80060-10060-400
Door Over Distribution(per cell)
60-80060-10060-400
Channel Base60-80060-10060-400
Copper Bus (per cell)60-80060-10060-4001
Single Phase Protection 60-10060-400
Special Paint (per cell)60-80060-10060-400
Description Switchoard List Price ‡
Fibre Entry/Exit Plate60-80060-10060-400
Aluminum Entry/Exit Plate60-80060-10060-400
Mimic Bus60-80060-10060-400
Quebec Hydro Ground Stud
60-80060-10060-400
Surge Arrester60-80060-10060-400
Vermin Screen 60-10060-400
Switchboard Main AmpsList Price ‡
Al Cu
60-100
4006008001200
60-400
160020002500
30004000
Switchboard Main AmpsList ‡
Al Cu
60-400
160020002500
30004000
Corner Sections
Transition Sections
Switchboard Main AmpsList Price ‡
Al Cu
60-100
4006008001200
60-400
160020002500
30004000
Bus Duct Entry/Exit Top Only (I-Line)
Class 6037
Power-Zone® 4Low Voltage, Metal-Enclosed, Drawout Switchgear with Masterpact® NW and NT Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Catalog
05
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
“Product Description” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5“General and Application Information” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11“Technical Overview” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37“Wiring Diagrams” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69“Dimensions” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75“Suggested Specifications” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Power-Zone® 4Table of Contents
311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS......................................................................................................................... 3
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................... 5
Section Contents ............................................................................................................................. 5Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 6
Features and Benefits ............................................................................................................... 6Compartmentalization ................................................................................................................ 7UL Listing ................................................................................................................................... 7Functional Capacity ................................................................................................................... 7Maximum Uptime ....................................................................................................................... 7Ease of Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 7Auxiliary Instrument Compartments .......................................................................................... 7Secondary Horizontal and Vertical Wireways ............................................................................ 7ANSI Interrupting and Short-Time (Withstand) .......................................................................... 7Through-the-Door Construction ................................................................................................. 7Disconnecting Contacts ............................................................................................................. 8Micrologic® Enhanced Functionality .......................................................................................... 8Powerlogic® Monitoring System ................................................................................................ 8Equipment Standards ................................................................................................................ 8Equipment Ratings .................................................................................................................... 9
GENERAL AND APPLICATION INFORMATION ................................................................................ 11
Section Contents ........................................................................................................................... 11Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 12Structure ........................................................................................................................................ 13Enclosures .................................................................................................................................... 15
Control and Communications Wiring ....................................................................................... 17Rear Cable Compartment ........................................................................................................ 19Bus Compartment .................................................................................................................... 20Auxiliary Instrument Compartments ........................................................................................ 21Micrologic® Trip Units .............................................................................................................. 29Powerlogic System .................................................................................................................. 31
Arc Flash Protection with Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers .......................................................... 34
TECHNICAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 37
Section Contents ........................................................................................................................... 37Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 38
Power-Zone 4 Switchgear Ratings .......................................................................................... 38Masterpact NW and NT Circuit Breakers ................................................................................ 38Micrologic Trip Units ................................................................................................................ 41Trip Curves .............................................................................................................................. 43Selection Tables with Transformer Ratings ............................................................................. 54Distribution Systems ................................................................................................................ 60High Resistance Grounded Systems ....................................................................................... 65Automatic Transfer Systems ................................................................................................... 67Special Applications ................................................................................................................ 68
WIRING DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................................................... 69
Section Contents .......................................................................................................................... 69Basic Electrically Operated Circuit Breaker Diagrams .................................................................. 70
Masterpact NW/NT Alarm and Cradle Contacts ...................................................................... 70Masterpact NW/NT Power, Trip Unit, and Remote Operation ................................................. 72
DIMENSIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 75
Section Contents ........................................................................................................................... 75
4© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Table of Contents
Top and Bottom Conduit Entrance Layouts ................................................................................... 76System Design .............................................................................................................................. 88Weights .......................................................................................................................................... 90
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................................ 91
Section Contents ........................................................................................................................... 91General .......................................................................................................................................... 92
Standards ................................................................................................................................ 92Ratings ..................................................................................................................................... 92
Products ........................................................................................................................................ 93Manufacturers .......................................................................................................................... 93Structure .................................................................................................................................. 93Circuit Breaker Compartment .................................................................................................. 93Bus Compartment .................................................................................................................... 94Cable Compartment ................................................................................................................ 95Circuit Breakers and Trip Units ................................................................................................ 95Metering and Instrumentation .................................................................................................. 96
Power-Zone® 4Product Description
511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
SECTION 1 : PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SECTION CONTENTS
“Introduction” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6“Features and Benefits” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6“Compartmentalization” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“UL Listing” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“Functional Capacity” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“Maximum Uptime” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“Ease of Maintenance” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“Auxiliary Instrument Compartments” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“Secondary Horizontal and Vertical Wireways” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“ANSI Interrupting and Short-Time (Withstand)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“Through-the-Door Construction” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7“Disconnecting Contacts” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8“Micrologic® Enhanced Functionality” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8“Powerlogic® Monitoring System” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8“Equipment Standards” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8“Equipment Ratings” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
6© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Product Description
INTRODUCTION
Power-Zone® 4 low voltage, metal-enclosed, drawout switchgear is designed to provide superior electrical distribution, protection, and power quality management for the entire facility. The prime components of the switchgear are the Masterpact® NW and Masterpact NT ANSI-rated circuit breakers. Power-Zone 4 switchgear is designed to maximize the functionality of the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers, which, in turn, deliver maximum uptime, system selectivity, ease of maintenance and circuit protection. All of this in the smallest footprint available for low voltage drawout switchgear.
Features and Benefits
• Power-Zone 4 is designed and built to ANSI® C37.20.1 and is listed to UL® 1558.
• Masterpact NW and NT drawout low voltage power circuit breakers are designed and built to ANSI C37.13 and C37.16., and are listed to UL1066.
• Short-circuit current rating up to 200 kA without fuses.
• High short-time withstand ratings up to 100 kA for 30 cycles.
• Family of field installable and upgradeable Micrologic® trip units with optional Powerlogic® data communications features.
• Smallest equipment footprint available in this product class.
• Front access to control and communications wire connections.
• Bolted copper bus provided as standard (up to 5000 A maximum).
• Large rear cable compartment pull area allows maximum room for power cables.
• Bus provision for future equipment expansion.
• System designed for maximum uptime with low maintenance.
• Modular circuit breaker design for easy addition of control accessories.
Figure 2: Through-the-Door Access
Figure 3: Circuit Breaker Compartment with Secondary Horizontal and Vertical Wireways
Figure 1: Power-Zone 4 Switchgear
Figure 4: Powerlogic System Manager Software
Figure 7: Family of Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers
Figure 5: Family of Micrologic Trip Units
Figure 6: Masterpact NT Circuit Breaker
Power-Zone® 4Product Description
711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Compartmentalization
Structures are compartmentalized and are built with barriers as required by ANSI C37.20.1. The structure has large conduit space within the main and feeder sections.
UL Listing
Power-Zone 4 switchgear is designed and engineered to comply with UL1558 requirements. Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers are UL1066 listed. A UL label can be affixed where UL coverage exists for all component material, parts, and devices in a switchgear section.
Functional Capacity
High current carrying capacity frame sizes and high withstand rating make the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers ideal for application on today’s high capacity distribution systems.
Maximum Uptime
Drawout construction allows quick and simple replacement of circuit breaker elements. If an emergency occurs, circuit breakers may be removed from low-priority circuits and re-installed to serve high-priority circuits.
Ease of Maintenance
Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers provide disconnecting and overload protection for the circuit they control. Each is contained in an individual compartment and can be easily isolated from the energized circuit and withdrawn from the compartment for quick inspection, maintenance, or replacement. The entire switchgear or any other feeder circuits need not be shut down during this operation, thus minimizing production downtime.
Auxiliary Instrument Compartments
Optional control power transformers, meters, and other control devices can be mounted in the auxiliary instrument compartments. These compartments are furnished with hinged doors for easy access.
Secondary Horizontal and Vertical Wireways
The secondary wiring design allows for front access to circuit breaker control and communications wiring without removing the circuit breaker from its compartment. The vertical wireway is located on the right side of the circuit breaker for easy access and wiring installation. The horizontal wireway is located directly above the circuit breaker, providing direct access to control and communication terminations.
ANSI Interrupting and Short-Time (Withstand)
Power-Zone 4 switchgear with Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers has the highest interrupting and short-time (withstand) ratings for low voltage switchgear in the smallest physical size. The elimination of limiter fuses for high interrupting Masterpact NW circuit breakers reduces space and cost. The ANSI rated circuit breaker’s improved coordination with downstream devices increase system uptime.
Through-the-Door Construction
Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers provide clear access to all circuit breaker controls, indicators, and trip unit functionality without opening the compartment door. Circuit breaker racking is also achieved with the compartment door closed.
8© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Product Description
Disconnecting Contacts
The main disconnecting contacts (power plug-on fingers) on the rear of the circuit breaker are spring loaded and self-aligning to ensure positive electrical contact when the circuit breaker is in the connected position. The secondary disconnecting contacts are located on the top front of the circuit breaker element and are used for connecting the accessories to the control power source, other control circuits, or communication circuits.
Micrologic® Enhanced Functionality
A new family of Micrologic electronic and programmable trip units provide a choice of expanded information, power quality readings, and communication capabilities. Micrologic trip units can be integrated into the optional Powerlogic system.
Powerlogic® Monitoring System
Power-Zone 4 switchgear is available with the Powerlogic metering, data acquisition, and control system. The optional Powerlogic system is used in addition to, or in lieu of, the Type A, Type P, and Type H Micrologic® trip units for the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers. Powerlogic functions are included in Micrologic high-end trip units. Several highly accurate circuit monitors are available to work in conjunction with the Powerlogic System Manager Software to manage and control the electrical distribution system.
Equipment Standards
All Power-Zone® 4 switchgear are 100% rated and are assembled and tested in an ISO 9001 facility to applicable standards including:
All Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers are 100% rated and are assembled and tested in an ISO 9001 facility to applicable standards including:
Standard Description
ANSI C37.20.1 Metal-enclosed low voltage circuit breaker switchgear
ANSI C.37.51 Testing of metal-enclosed low voltage ac circuit breaker switchgear
NEMA SG-5 Power switchgear assemblies
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 31-M89 Switchgear assemblies
UBC and CBC Zone 4 seismic applications
UL 1558 Switchgear assemblies
Standard Description
ANSI C37.13 Low voltage ac power circuit breakers used in equipment
ANSI C37.16 Preferred rating, related requirement and application recommendations for low voltage power circuit breakers and ac power circuit breakers
ANSI C37.17 Trip devices for ac and general-purpose dc low voltage power circuit breakers
ANSI C37.50 Testing of low voltage ac circuit breakers
NEMA SG-3 Low voltage circuit breakers
UL 1066 Low voltage circuit breakers
Power-Zone® 4Product Description
911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Equipment Ratings
Application Voltage Systems Ampacities
600 Vac Maximum1600 A–5000 A (main circuit breaker or main lugs only)1Ø3W, 3Ø3W, 3Ø4W
50/60 Hz
Short-Circuit Current Ratings Short-Time Withstand Ratings
240 V 480 V 600 V
42 kA 42 kA 42 kA 42 kA
65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA
85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA
200 kA 200 kA 130 kA 100 kA (maximum)
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
1111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
SECTION 2 : GENERAL AND APPLICATION INFORMATION
SECTION CONTENTS
“Introduction” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12“Structure” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13“Enclosures” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
“Control and Communications Wiring” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17“Rear Cable Compartment” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19“Bus Compartment” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20“Auxiliary Instrument Compartments” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21“Micrologic® Trip Units” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29“Powerlogic System” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
“Arc Flash Protection with Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers” . . . . . . . . . . 34“Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker Technology” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
12© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
INTRODUCTION
Power-Zone® 4 switchgear with Masterpact® NW and NT circuit breakers provides the optimal switchgear solution in an industrial environment. The switchgear is designed for ease of use, system selectivity, system uptime, and low maintenance. The switchgear is easy to operate and maintain because of the technological advances in communications, power quality monitoring, and measuring capabilities.
The switchgear with drawout Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers provides overload, short-circuit, and ground fault protection for circuits up to 600 volts. All trip unit and circuit breaker functions are operational from the front without opening the circuit breaker compartment door. Masterpact NW circuit breakers carry the highest interruption ratings without fuses, and require minimal space.
All Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers can be equipped with Micrologic® electronic and programmable trip units to provide a choice of expanded information, power quality measurement, protection, and communication capabilities. Additionally, the optional high-end Micrologic trip units are compatible with the optional Powerlogic system.
The optional Powerlogic® data communications system can be used in lieu of or in addition to Micrologic trip units. The Powerlogic system uses highly accurate circuit monitors that work in conjunction with its System Manager Software to manage and control the electrical distribution system.
Power-Zone 4 switchgear is commonly found as the electrical service in the following applications:
• Chemical refinery
• Manufacturing
• Heavy assembly plants
• Large warehouses
• Semi-conductor manufacturing
• Textile mills
• Large office buildings
• University facilities
• Airports
• Data centers
• Hospitals
• Food and beverage facilities
• Wastewater and water treatment facilities
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
1311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
STRUCTURE
The switchgear assembly is composed of vertical sections arranged according to customer requirements. Each section is divided into a maximum of four compartments when using Masterpact NW circuit breakers, or a maximum of eight compartments when using Masterpact NT circuit breakers. One or more of these compartments can be used as an auxiliary instrument compartment containing potential transformers, meters, relays, and control devices.
A horizontal secondary wireway, containing the accessory terminal blocks, is directly above each circuit breaker. A spacious vertical wireway is on the right side of each circuit breaker compartment to allow wire routing through the switchgear.
Figure 3: Switchgear (Side View)Power-Zone 4 switchgear offers compartmentalized construction. Each vertical section consists of three compartments: a front compartment (including secondary wireway), a bus compartment, and a rear cable compartment. The front compartment is divided into a maximum of four or eight compartments that can contain Masterpact NW or NT circuit breakers or auxiliary equipment. If desired, all compartments may be used for auxiliary equipment, circuit breakers, or a combination. The circuit breaker is positioned to allow ample room for control and communications wiring. Hinged doors on the auxiliary instrument compartment are available for mounting meters, relays, or other control equipment when it does not contain a circuit breaker. A circuit monitor display may be mounted on the hinged door of a compartment containing a main circuit breaker.
Rear cable compartment
Bus compartment
Base channel
14© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
The examples below depict a typical Power-Zone 4 switchgear assembly.
Removable hinged rear door with latches (not shown; optional)
Removable top plate
Removable side panel (not shown)
Auxiliary instrument compartments
Circuit breaker compartments
Removable bottom plate(optional)
Pilot Lights (optional)
Standard ANSI #49 gray corrosion resistant finish
Quarter turn door latches
Hinged doors
Through-the-door circuit breaker access
Family of Micrologic® trip units
Wiring trough
Powerlogic® circuit monitor display (optional)
Switchgear (Rear View)Switchgear (Front View)
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
1511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
ENCLOSURES
NEMA Type 1 Indoor Enclosures
The standard Power-Zone 4 switchgear enclosure is NEMA Type 1, general purpose. NEMA Type 1 enclosures are dead front, metal-enclosed structures. All sheet steel parts of the enclosure, inside and out, are painted using an electro-deposition process.
Figure 4: POWER ZONE 4 Switchgear, NEMA Type 1, Indoor Enclosure
Standard Features:
• Secondary wiring areas
• Removable, steel top plates over conduit entrance
• Hinged front doors with latches
• Circuit breaker or instrument compartment
• Bus compartment
• Cable compartment
• Capability for future expansion
• Two-piece removable side and back plates
• 1 1/2-inch-high base channels
• Electro-deposition paint process on structural parts
• ANSI #49 paint color
• Customer nameplates for each compartment
• White instrument mounting pans
Available Options:
• Vertical bus barriers
• Strip heaters in circuit breaker, bus, and cable compartments
• Overhead circuit breaker lifting device or floor crane
• Gasketing around doors and between sections
• Filtering of doors and vents
• Lockable, hinged rear doors
• Lockable, hinged front doors
• 18-inch-high pull box
• Bottom plates
• Rodent barriers
16© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
NEMA Type 3R Walk-In Enclosures
Power-Zone 4 switchgear is also available in a NEMA Type 3R walk-in enclosure for outdoor installation.
Figure 5: NEMA Type 3R, Walk-In Outdoor Enclosure
Available Options:
• Exhaust fan ventilation/inside temperature control
• Exterior lighting
• Undercoating
• Inside emergency lighting
• Top entry/exit for incoming and outgoing cables
Standard Features:
• Front aisle with steel entrance door equipped with panic hardware
• Lockable, hinged rear doors
• Interior fluorescent lighting
• Three-way light switch and convenience outlets near the entrance door
• Strip heaters in circuit breaker and bus compartments
• Overhead circuit breaker lifting device (traveling lifter assembly)
• Removable gasketed steel cover plates over conduit entrance
• One-piece construction for ease of installation
NOTE: Assembly may be required if shipped split.
NEMA Type 3R, Walk-In Outdoor Enclosure
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
1711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Control and Communications Wiring
Figure 6: Conduit Entrances
Horizontal Wireway
The secondary horizontal wireway (see Figure 7 on page 18) is directly above each circuit breaker compartment, allowing easy access to finger-safe secondary terminals. Each secondary terminal is dedicated to a specific function, allowing standardized wiring.
The secondary disconnecting contacts are on the top front of the circuit breaker element and connect the accessories to the control power source or other control circuits. These contacts are in the connected position when the circuit breaker is in the connect and test positions.
Vertical Wireway
The vertical wireway (see Figure 7 on page 18) is on the right side of the circuit breaker for quick and easy wiring installation.
Control and Communications Terminals
All accessory terminals are on a connecting block on the top front of the circuit breaker cradle and are accessible from the front, even with the circuit breaker in the test or disconnect position. This is particularly useful for field inspection and modification. The field-installable electrical accessories are UL Listed.
Punchable, removable plate
Two bottom conduit entrances
Top Control Conduit Entrance
Bottom Control Conduit Entrances
Control and communication wiring is installed and connected from the front of the switchgear. The secondary wiring design allows for circuit breaker compartment wiring without removing the circuit breaker from its compartment.
Control Conduit Entrances
The control wiring conduit entrance is in both the top and bottom of each section for maximum flexibility.
A removable top plate (4-inch by 5-inch) can be punched easily; up to four individual 3/4-inch control conduits per section.
Two bottom conduit entrances in each circuit breaker compartment permit cables to exit through the bottom of the compartment.
18© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
Figure 7: Secondary Wiring System
• Locking pull-apart terminal blocks at shipping splits
— Sleeve type “destination” wire markings
— Grommeted holes between circuit breaker compartments
Available Options:
• Ring tongue control wiring
• Communications wiringAWG #22 shielded
Standard Features:
• Control wires in wiring trough above the circuit breaker compartment
• Secondary terminal block originates directly from the circuit breaker without the use of an intermediate terminal block for factory and customer wiring
• Snap-in wire tie provisions
• Cage clamp terminal blocks locked directly on the circuit breaker cradle
• Control wiring AWG #14 SIS
• Metering CT wiring AWG #10 SIS
Secondary disconnecting terminals
Secondary terminal block
Secondary horizontal wirewayControl
wiring
Vertical wireway
Secondary disconnecting contacts
Shutters (optional)
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
1911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Rear Cable Compartment
The rear cable compartment is located behind the bus compartment. It provides room for rear access cable installation. Silver plated copper load bars extend from the load side of the circuit breaker’s stationary connecting contacts into the cable compartment. Cable terminations on the load bars permit cables to exit through either the top or bottom of the vertical sections.
Figure 8: Rear Cable Compartment
Figure 9: Mechanical Lugs
Standard Features:
• Mechanical lugs provided for customer connections
• Largest conduit area in this product class
• Two-piece removable rear covers (not shown)
• 3/0–750 kcmil lugs
Available Options:
• Compression lugs
• Cable supports
• Hinged full height rear door with padlock provisions
• Load connection to I-LINE® busway
• 18-inch pull box
Mechanical lug cable terminations
Mechanical lug ground terminations
Bus compartment barriers (optional)
Mechanical cable lugs are standard for customer cable connections. Optional compression lugs are available with Power-Zone 4 switchgear. Optional cable supports (not shown) provide additional assistance in customer wiring.
Compression lug cable terminations (optional)
Load bars
20© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
Bus Compartment
The bus compartment contains the horizontal and vertical bus, and is located between the circuit breaker compartment and the cable compartment. The bus compartment is separated from the circuit breaker compartment with grounded steel barriers. The optional side and rear barriers isolate the bus compartment from the rear cable compartment. In addition, service entrance barriers provide isolation around the incoming lines to meet UL and NEC requirements. Optional insulated bus helps protect the bus in harsh environments.
On four-wire systems, a neutral bus extends the length of the line-up and includes taps for the neutral cables in each vertical section. Feeder circuit breaker neutral sensors (current transformers) are provided on these taps when ground fault protection is supplied. A removable link to the ground bus is furnished, but not connected, in the main vertical section for grounded, four-wire systems. The ground bus is a plated copper bus bar that is bolted to the rear bottom of the cable compartment and extends the entire length of the switchgear.
All bus joints use a minimum of two grade-5 bolts and are secured with conical-type spring washers for maximum joint integrity. Bus sizing is based on ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1 continuous current test criteria. Standard bus is plated copper and is fully rated. All vertical and cross bus ratings in Power-Zone 4 switchgear are based on a standard temperature rise of 149 °F (65 °C) above a maximum ambient air temperature of 104 °F (40 °C).
Figure 10: Bus Compartment
Neutral bus
Horizontal cross bus
Vertical bus riser
Neutral bus
Bus Compartment (Rear View)
Neutral ground fault sensor
Neutral busGround bus
Bus Compartment (Side View)
Standard Features:
• Silver plated copper bus bars
• Up to 5000 A continuous, 100% rated
• All bus bars are sized for full system capacity
• Minimum of two grade-5 bolt conical washer joints
• Sleeve type insulated runbacks
Available Options:
• Bus compartment barriers
• Side barriers in cable compartment
• Neutral bus center for easy terminations
• Tin plated copper bus
• Bus sized to 1,000 amps/in 2
• Full insulated bus-sleeve type insulated with boots over joints
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
2111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Auxiliary Instrument Compartments
Auxiliary instrument compartments are the same size as circuit breaker compartments. Typical auxiliary instrument compartments contain control power transformers, control components, meters, relays, and other optional devices. Circuit monitor displays and other metering devices can be mounted on the door.
Figure 11: Typical Auxiliary Instrument Compartment
Auxiliary Sections
Optional, full-height, auxiliary sections with hinged front doors are available that can be bolted to feeder and main switchgear sections. In addition, auxiliary sections can be provided with through bus as needed.
Key Locks and Padlocks
Optional key locks and padlocks can be provided for the door latches on circuit breaker compartments, auxiliary instrument compartments, auxiliary sections, and the rear doors on switchgear sections.
Moving and Handling Options
Whether configured as a single unit or as multiple units assembled together within a shipping group Power-Zone 4 switchgear enclosures are designed to withstand the rigors of lifting, handling, shipping, and setting into place. Maximum sizes are determined by shipping dimensions required for transportation on common carrier trucks and movement through standard equipment location openings (door and portals).
22© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
Figure 12: Circuit Breaker Lifter Bar
Traveling Lifter Assembly
A rail-mounted, traveling type, circuit breaker lifting device is optionally available with indoor type switchgear. The lifting device is capable of lifting Masterpact NW or NT circuit breakers into and out of any compartment. The circuit breaker is raised or lowered by manually cranking the hoisting mechanism. The manually operated traveling lifter assembly is supplied with outdoor walk-in enclosures as standard.
NOTE: The lifting device is not available on enclosures with drip hoods.
Figure 13: Rail-mounted Circuit Breaker LIfting Device
Floor Crane (Not Pictured)
A floor crane can move into and out of any compartment, and can be used with the lifter bar to move a Masterpact circuit breaker into a dedicated work area.
NOTE: The floor crane can not be used in the outdoor walk-in enclosures.
Masterpact Circuit Breakers
The primary component of the Power-Zone 4 switchgear are the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers. The drawout circuit breaker design allows easy access to circuit breaker controls, indicators, and the trip unit without opening the circuit breaker compartment door.
Masterpact NT/NW circuit breaker features and benefits:
The circuit breaker lifter bar is used with both 3-pole and 6-pole Masterpact NW circuit breakers. The size of the circuit breaker determines whether the inside or outside notches on the lifter bar will be used.
Winch mechanismCarriage
assembly
Winch hook
Lifting hook
• Through-the-door construction with front-accessible key interlocks
• Buttons• Indicators• Individually-mounted• ANSI rated,• Four-position
• Low voltage power circuit breakers• Up to 200 kA interrupting rating without fuses (NW)• 42kA at 480 volts (NT)• 100% rated, two-step stored energy mechanism• 800 A–5000 A frame (NW)• 800 A frame (NT)
• Field-installable, Micrologic trip units with optional Powerlogic, communications and monitoring features
• Enhanced functionality with low maintenance requirements
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
2311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 14: Through-the-Door Construction
Horizontal wireway
Vertical wireway
Extension rails
Racking crank storage and cradle operators
Powerlogic circuit monitor display (optional)
Masterpact NW circuit breaker
Through-the-Door Access
Circuit Breaker Compartment
Micrologic trip unit
Circuit Breaker Compartment with Current Transformers
Current transformers(optional)
Cell keys
Secondaryterminal block
Key padlock provision
Through-the-Door Construction
The closing and opening push buttons, the racking handle, and racking mechanism are accessible through the front door cutout, allowing circuit breaker operation and disconnection without opening the door. Optional shutters (see "Secondary Wiring System" on page 18) can be provided, covering live parts when the circuit breaker is removed.
Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers meet ANSI interlock requirements, including closing spring interlocking.
Circuit Breaker Compartment
The circuit breaker compartment consists of the circuit breaker cradle, a horizontal secondary terminal block on top of the cradle, and a vertical wireway on the right side of the compartment allowing for top and bottom customer wiring. The cradle structure is a bolted-in assembly that supports the circuit breaker. Integrated into the cradle are the circuit breaker interference interlocks or cell keys.
Cell keys are steel pins on the left side of the cradle. As the circuit breaker is pushed into the compartment, the bracket on the circuit breaker moves past a corresponding bracket on the cradle. If the circuit breaker is not matched correctly for the compartment, the brackets will interfere and the circuit breaker will not go into the compartment. Cell keying is a standard Power-Zone 4 switchgear feature.
The racking crank storage hole, racking crank hole, and “Push Stop Release” button are on the bottom of the cradle. Circuit breaker racking is achieved with the circuit breaker compartment door closed.
When required for metering, optional current transformers are positioned around the stationary main contacts.
24© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
Interrupting and Short-Time (Withstand) Capability
Power-Zone 4 switchgear with Masterpact NW circuit breakers have the highest interrupting (200,000 A at 480 V without using fuses) and short-time (withstand) ratings for low voltage switchgear in the smallest physical size. The small switchgear footprint and the elimination of limiters reduces cost. The Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers’ wide range of coordination with downstream devices increases system uptime.
Masterpact NW circuit breakers are available in various levels of interrupting ratings (AIR). See “Masterpact NW and NT Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating” on page 39.
NOTE: Circuit breakers of like frame sizes and interrupting ratings are interchangeable.
Circuit Breaker Types
Figure 15: Family of Masterpact Circuit Breakers (800 A–5000 A)
NW08, NW16, NW20, NW32 (800 A–3200 A) N1, H1, H2
NW08, NW16 (800 A–1600 A) L1, L1F
NW20 (2000 A) L1, L1F-Feeder
NW40, NW50 (4000 A–5000 A) H2, L1
NW20, NW32 (2000 A–3200 A) L1
Number Amperes
NW08N1NW08H1NW08H2NW08L1NW08L1F
800
NW16N1NW16H1NW16H2NW16L1NW08L1F
1600
NW20H1NW20H2NW20L1NW08L1F
2000
NW32H1NW32H2NW32L1
3200
NW40H2NW40L1 4000
NW50H2NW50L1 5000
NT08N1 800
NT08N1 (800 A)
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
2511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Circuit Breaker Parts
The Masterpact® NW circuit breaker has fewer parts than conventional circuit beakers while performing the same functions.
Figure 16: Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker (Front and Side View)
The main disconnecting contacts on the rear of the circuit breaker are spring loaded and self-aligning. These contacts are designed so the pressure at the point of contact on the stationary connectors becomes greater under short-circuit conditions.
Figure 17: Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker (Rear View)
Key interlocks (optional)
Arc chute and chamber
Secondary disconnecting contacts
Charging handle
Fault Indicator and reset button
Push on button
Charge/discharge indicator
Push off buttonMicrologic trip unit
Open/close indicator
Electrical close push button (optional)
Operations counter (optional)Sensor plug
Circuit breaker name plate
Main disconnecting contacts
26© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
Circuit Breaker Operation
Power-Zone 4 switchgear with Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers has through-the-door circuit breaker racking. The connect, test, and disconnect positions can be made with the circuit breaker compartment door closed.
Through-the-DoorCircuit Breaker Position (side view)
Primary Connectors
Secondary (Control)
ConnectorsCircuit Breaker Functionality
Circuit Breaker
Door Position
Connect
Engaged Engaged
a) Can be operated mechanically and electrically.
b) Ready for service.
Closed
Test
Disengaged Engaged
a) Can be operated mechanically and electrically.
b) Can have operation and control systems tested.
Closed
Disconnect
Disengaged Disengaged
a) Can not be operated remotely.
b) Can not be removed from circuit breaker compartment.
Closed
Remove
Disengaged Disengaged
a) Can not be operated remotely.
b) Can be removed from circuit breaker compartment.
Open
Circuit breaker is fully extended on rails.
T TEST
T TEST
T TEST
T TEST
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
2711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Two-Step Stored Energy Mechanism
Figure 18: Charging the Closing Springs
Circuit Breaker Inspection
When a Masterpact NW or NT circuit breaker is withdrawn on its rails, the circuit breaker is accessible for visual inspection. It is easy to remove the arc chutes and visually inspect the contacts and wear indicator. The operations counter can also indicate when inspections and possible maintenance should be done.
Figure 19: Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker
Electric motor charge button (not shown)
Open/close indicator
Charging handle
Charged/discharged indicator
Push to close button
Operations counter (optional)
Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers are stored energy devices with a two-step operating mechanism.
Electrically operated circuit breakers have a motor to charge the stored energy mechanism, electric close feature, and electric open feature.
On manually operated circuit breakers, the closing springs are charged by hand. For electrically operated circuit breakers, the springs are charged by an internal electric motor, but can also be manually charged if no control power is available.
Status indicators on the front of the circuit breaker indicate when the closing springs are charged or discharged.
Push to open button
Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker on Its Rails
Arc chute and chamber
Trip unit
Spring charging motor
Accessory terminal connections
Secondary disconnecting contacts
Contact wear indicator, under arc chutes *
Operations counter
Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker Front Plate Removed
* The contact wear indication is available on Micrologic P and H trip units.
Removable, replaceable, and upgradeable circuit breaker parts include:
• Arc chutes• Main disconnecting contacts or clusters• Internal movable contacts
• Spring charging motor• Trip unit
28© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
Circuit Breaker and Equipment Accessories
A number of Masterpact NW and NT circuit breaker accessories are available with Power-Zone 4 switchgear. A few of the most common accessories are listed below.
Circuit Breaker Compartment
Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker
Shutters (optional)
Circuit breaker operation interlocking (not shown)
Shutters key lock
Cradle key locks
Cell keying location
NOTE: Refer to the Masterpact® NW and NT circuit breaker catalog for additional information.
Shutters:
Optional shutters in the cradle automatically block access to the main disconnects when the circuit breaker is in the disconnect, test, or remove position. An optional padlock attachment to lock shutters closed is also available.
Key Interlocks, Key Locks, and Padlocks:
Optional key interlocking can be provided with Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers. Key interlocking capability is available for circuit breaker operation and the cradle.
Key interlock operation is outlined in the Power-Zone 4 switchgear order assembly drawings. To facilitate installation procedures, a key is supplied with each lock. After Installation, only the necessary keys called out on the key interlock diagrams should be present on the switchgear.
Cell Keying:
Cell keying, a standard feature on Power-Zone 4 switchgear, is provided to avoid insertion of circuit breakers with similar dimensions, but insufficient interrupting ratings, or incorrect frame sizes into an inappropriate circuit breaker compartment.
Auxiliary Switches:
A family of auxiliary switches that include:
• Open and close position switches (OF)
• Connected and closed position switches (EF); also known as cell switches
• Cradle position switch (CE, CD, CT)
Field-installable and Upgradeable Options:
A family of field-installable coils, buttons, motors, connectors, and trip units that include, but are not limited to:
• Trip units with or without Powerlogic® monitoring capabilities (see pages 29–30)
• Opening and closing coils (MX, XF)
• Additional shunt trip unit (MX)
• Undervoltage release (MN)
• Spring charging motor (MCH)
• Sensor plug
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
2911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Micrologic® Trip Units
A new family of field-installable trip units is available with Masterpact® NW and NT circuit breakers. The circuit breaker overcurrent protection consists of a solid-state, microprocessor-based tripping device that requires no external power source. The complete tripping system has three main components: the molded sensors, the trip device (with rating plug), and the trip actuator. The microprocessor-based trip unit uses true RMS current level sensing. For additional information, refer to the trip unit functionality matrix on page 41.
When a Masterpact NW or NT circuit breaker is closed, no external power is required for the protection system. The trip unit is powered by current signal levels and current sensors integrally mounted in the Masterpact NW or NT circuit breaker. All trip units are UL Listed for use in Masterpact NW or NT circuit breakers.
Basic Trip Unit
Standard Trip Features:
• True RMS sensing
• LI trip configuration
• Field interchangeable long-time rating plugs
• LED long-time pickup indication
• Thermal imaging
Available Options:
• LSI trip configuration
• Test kits
Standard Trip Features:
• True RMS sensing
• LI trip configuration
• Field interchangeable long-time rating plugs
• LED long-time pickup indication LSIG trip configurations
• Digital ammeter–phase and neutral
• Phase loading bar graph
• LED trip indication
• Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) with short-time and ground fault
• Thermal imaging
Available Options:
• LSI trip configuration
• LSIG (ground fault trip)
• Test kits
Available Powerlogic® Features:
• Amps metering
• Circuit breaker open/close trip status
• Tripping curves
Type A (Ammeter) Trip Unit
Micrologic Basic Trip Unit
Micrologic Type A Trip Unit
30© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
Type P (Power Metering) Trip Unit
Type H (Harmonics) Trip Unit
NOTE: Refer to the Masterpact® NW/NT circuit breaker catalog for detailed information about the family of Micrologic trip units.
Available Options:
• LSIG (ground fault trip with programmable ground fault alarm)
• Test kits
Available Powerlogic Features:
• Amps metering
• Volts metering
• Energy accumulation
• Remote operation
• Circuit breaker open/close trip status
• Date/time stamping
Standard Trip Features:
• All standard features of Micrologic Type A trip unit
• LSI trip configuration
• Incremental “fine tuning” of L, S, I, and, when selected, G pickup and delay settings
• LCD dot matrix display and LED trip indication
• Advanced user interface
• Advanced user protection (includes, but not limited to):
• over/under voltage• over/under frequency
• IDMTL: selectable long-time delay bands
• Thermal imaging
• Power measurement
• Contact wear indication
• Temperature indication
• Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) with short-time and ground fault
Micrologic Type P Trip Unit
Micrologic Type H Trip Unit
Standard Trip Features:
• All standard features of Micrologic Type P trip unit
• Advanced power measurements functions
• Fault waveform capture
Available Options:
• LSIG (ground fault trip) with programmable ground fault alarm
• Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) with short-time and ground fault
• Test kits
Available Powerlogic Features:
• Amps metering
• Volts metering
• Energy accumulation
• Remote operation
• Waveform capture
• Data logging
• Circuit breaker open/close trip status
• Power quality measurements
• Harmonics measurements through 51st
• Date/time stamping
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
3111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Powerlogic System
Power-Zone 4 switchgear is available with Powerlogic® metering, data acquisition, and control system features. The Powerlogic system is used in conjunction with Micrologic® Type A, Type P, and Type H trip units for the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers. The complete system is comprised of several devices including: circuit monitors, power meters, trip units, programmable logic controllers, digital relays, transformer temperature controllers, I/O, lighting control, and more. System Manager Software is available to work in conjunction with these devices to manage and control an electrical distribution system.
Modbus® industry standard data communications allow the Powerlogic system to replace discrete meters, multiple transducers, analog wires, and analog-to-digital conversion equipment. Extensive information can be transmitted over a single communications cable to a Powerlogic system display, a personal computer, programmable logic controller, or other host system.
The following Micrologic trip units are Powerlogic compatible:
• Type A
• Type P
• Type H
Basic circuit information, such as amperes, can be monitored using the Micrologic Type A trip unit. Circuit breaker remote operation is available using the Micrologic types P, and H trip units with Powerlogic functionality. For additional information, see the trip unit functionality matrix on page 41. For more sophisticated metering, power quality monitoring, data acquisition and control, Powerlogic circuit monitors may also be used.
Micrologic Trip Unit System Summary
In addition to its metering capabilities, the Micrologic trip unit system is available with optional status inputs and relay outputs for monitoring discrete contacts and remote control of devices by way of the data communications channel.
Micrologic trip unit metering functions include:
Micrologic trip unit relaying functions include:
Masterpact NW/NT circuit breaker maintenance information:
• Amperes and volts
• Frequency
• Power
• Power demand
• Energy
• Energy demand
• Power factor
• Power quality measurements
• Communications
• Fault waveform capture
• Waveform capture
• Data logging
• Programmable contacts
• Current unbalance
• Over/under voltage
• Over/under frequency
• Voltage unbalance
• Phase loss
• Phase sequence
• Reverse power
• Thermal imaging
• Contact wear indicator
• Temperature indication
32© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
System Communications
The Powerlogic®, monitoring system, as well as Transparent Ready® Web Enabled (TRE) equipment, is available, as an option, with Power-Zone 4 switchgear.
The Powerlogic power monitoring and control systems, and (TRE) systems use a high-performance ethernet backbone with Modbus® communications. Information about the switchgear and its components is passed to and from a local or remote computer system using Powerlogic Modbus data communications.
Figure 20: Powerlogic Data Communications System / TRE
Micrologic trip unit
Modbus TCP/IP
Circuit monitor Web server with ethernet
PLC interface
Ethern
et
Standard PC Web browser
Powerlogic system manager
Modbus TCP/IP
Power meter
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
3311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
System Components
Powerlogic® system components and additional features are listed below.
Circuit Monitors
Powerlogic circuit monitors provide highly accurate meter readings along with disturbance monitoring, analog and digital I/O, onboard logging, and more. Circuit monitors can be mounted on Power-Zone 4 switchgear, auxiliary instrument compartments, and auxiliary sections.
Figure 21: Powerlogic Circuit Monitor Display
Detailed information about the Powerlogic system and components can be found in the Powerlogic monitoring and control system catalogs.
Available Powerlogic Features:
• Custom software applications
• Communication interfaces
Powerlogic System Components:
• System Manager Software
• Powerlogic ethernet gateway
• NOE ethernet card
• TCP/IP Modbus®
• PLCs
• Circuit monitor
• Power meters
• Automatic control
• Digital relay
• Motor protection
• Transformer module
• Micrologic® trip units
Powerlogic circuit monitor display (optional)
34© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
ARC FLASH PROTECTION WITH MASTERPACT NW CIRCUIT BREAKERS
What is an Arc Flash?
An arc flash occurs when insulation or isolation between electrified conductors is breached or can no longer withstand the applied voltage. As employees work on or near energized conductors or circuits, movement near or contact with the equipment (or a failure of the equipment) may cause a phase-to-ground and/or a phase-to-phase fault. Temperatures of more than 5,000 degrees Fahrenheit and a powerful explosion can be produced in an arc flash incident. The Occupational Safety and Hazard Administration (OSHA) has begun to enforce the NFPA 70E safety guidelines for arc flash safety. The guidelines:
• provide analysis detailing arc flash incident energy, boundary distances, and the Personal Protective Equipment (PPE);
• state that PPE must be provided;
• mandate proper worker training;
• provide procedures for safe work practices;
• state that tools for a safe work environment must be provided; and
• state that equipment be installed in accordance with the safety requirements of the National Electrical Code.
Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker Technology
Breakthrough technology was used to design the new Masterpact® NW circuit breakers to interrupt large amounts of fault current without being protected by fuses. The same technology and design that allows the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers to interrupt large fault currents without fuses also provides very good arc flash limitation. The decision to design the Masterpact NW to eliminate the need for fuse protection is based on the following:
• Requirements for smaller footprints and space-saving installations;
• Avoidance of fuse installation, maintaining supplies, and the need to enter the equipment in order to check and change fuses;
• The need to be adjustable to provide coordination with downstream products and better arc flash protection.
Advantages of using Masterpact breakers and Power-Zone 4 switchgear when there are Arc Flash concerns:
• Arc Flash limiting feeder breakers up to 2000A reduce arc incident energy on downstream equipment such as motor control centers (MCC’s) and power distribution panels (PDP’s).
• Through-the-door breaker operation allows unit to be operated/racked while door is closed, this reduces NFPA 70E PPE category by one level.
• Optional rear hinged doors allow easy access to cables, this reduces NFPA 70E 2004 PPE category by one level.
• Masterpact arc flash breaker equations are easily inserted into software packages such as SKM Analysis to get these testing results.
For further information on applying Masterpact breakers for arc flash protection, refer to data bulletins 0613DB0202 and 0100DB0402.
Power-Zone® 4General and Application Information
3511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Calculating Arc Flash Incident energy using Masterpact NW L1F circuit breakers
Example 1:
Bolted fault currents at MCC is Ib = 17kA, bolted fault current at PDP is Ib = 40kA. Using the following Masterpact NW-LF equations from actual testing, we calculate the incident energy to be 1.15 cal/cm2 at the MCC and 3.31 cal/cm2 at the PDP. This allows workers to wear Class 0 and 1 PPE per NFPA 70E when working on or around energized parts. In addition to incident energy, flash protection boundaries can be calculated as well.
Main
MCCIb = 17kAE= 1.15 cal/cm2
Source
PDPIb = 40kAE= 3.31 cal/cm2
800A NW-L1F 2000A NW-L1F
Example 1
36© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 General and Application Information
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
3711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
SECTION 3 : TECHNICAL OVERVIEW
SECTION CONTENTS
“Introduction” n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38“Power-Zone 4 Switchgear Ratings” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38“Masterpact NW and NT Circuit Breakers” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38“Micrologic Trip Units” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41“Trip Curves” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43“Selection Tables with Transformer Ratings” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54“Distribution Systems” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60“High Resistance Grounded Systems” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65“Automatic Transfer Systems” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67“Special Applications” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
38© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
INTRODUCTION
This section contains basic technical information pertaining to the Power-Zone 4 switchgear, Masterpact® NW and NT circuit breakers, and Micrologic® trip units.
Power-Zone 4 Switchgear Ratings
Power-Zone 4 switchgear is industrial-duty equipment built to ANSI standards and uses 100% rated Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers. Switchgear ratings are listed below.
Masterpact NW and NT Circuit Breakers
This section contains basic Masterpact NW and NT circuit breaker interrupting, sensor, operating time, control power requirements, and switch ampere ratings. In addition, an overview of key interlock operation is described on page 41.
Ratings
Power-Zone 4 switchgear with Masterpact NW circuit breakers has the highest interrupting and short-time (withstand) ratings for low voltage switchgear in the smallest physical size. The small switchgear footprint and the elimination of limiters reduces cost. The circuit breaker’s improved coordination with downstream devices increases system uptime.
Power-Zone 4 switchgear using Masterpact NT circuit breakers allows the use of up to eight (8) 800 A frame breakers in a single, 30-inch wide section. This lets the user maintain a high concentration of power protection devices in a small physical size.
Masterpact NW circuit breakers are available in various levels of interrupting ratings (AIR) as listed in Table 1: on page 39.
Switchgear
120/208 to 600 Vac, 1Ø3W, 3Ø3W, or 3Ø4W
1600 A – 5000 A
50/60 Hz
up to 200 kA symmetrical short-circuit current
Bus Type Continuous Amperes Short-circuit current Short-time Withstand
Cross 1600, 2000, 3200, 4000, 500065 kA, 85 kA, 100 kA,
130 kA, 200 kA50 kA, 65 kA, 85 kA, 100 kA
Vertical 1600, 2000, 3200, 4000, 500065 kA, 85 kA, 100 kA,
130 kA, 200 kA50 kA, 65 kA, 85 kA, 100 kA
Neutral1600, 2000, 3200, 4000, 5000
NOTE: 50% ratings available
65 kA, 85 kA, 100 kA,
130 kA, 200 kA50 kA, 65 kA, 85 kA, 100 kA
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
3911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Table 1: Masterpact NW and NT Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating
1 Note: L1 circuit breakers cannot be combined with N1, H1, or H2 circuit breakers within the same switchgear lineup.
Trip CurrentRange
Circuit BreakerModel #
Instantaneous Trip Rating (A) Short-time Trip Rating (A)
208 V–240 V(254 V Max.)
480 V(508 V Max.)
600 V(635 V Max.)
208 V–240 V(254 V Max.)
480 V(508 V Max.)
600 V(635 V Max.)
40–800
40–800
40–800
40-800
40–800
40–800
320–1600
320–1600
320–1600
320–1600
320–1600
320–1600
400–2000
400–2000
400–2000
400–2000
400–2000
640–3200
640–3200
640–3200
640–3200
800–4000
800–4000
800–4000
1000–5000
1000–5000
1000–5000
40-800
NW08N1
NW08H1
NW08H2
NW08H3
NW08L11
NW08L1F
NW16N1
NW16H1
NW16H2
NW16H3
NW16L11
NW16L1F
NW20H1
NW20H2
NW20H3
NW20L11
NW20L1F
NW32H1
NW32H2
NW32H3
NW32L11
NW40H2
NW40H3
NW40L11
NW50H2
NW50H3
NW50L11
NT08N1
42,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
130,000
130,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
130,000
130,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
130,000
130,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
130,000
85,000
85,000
130,000
85,000
85,000
130,000
N/A
42,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
30,000
22,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
100,000
N/A
40© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Table 2: Various Sensor Capacities of Masterpact NW and NT Circuit Breakers.
NOTE: Minimum sensor rating is 50% of frame rating (except for 800 A frame).
Table 3: Masterpact NW/NT Circuit Breaker Approximate Operating Time Ratings
Table 4: Control Power-NW/NT Circuit Breakers and PZ-4 Switchgear Equipment
Table 5: Approximate Ampere Ratings for Masterpact NW/NT Circuit Breaker Switches
Circuit Breaker Type Sensor Rating (Amperes)
NW08N1
NWO8H1
NW08H2
NW08H3
NW08L1
NW08L1F
100, 250, 400, 600, 800
NW16N1
NW16H1
NW16H2
NW16H3
NW16L1
NW16L1F
800, 1200, 1600
NW20H1
NW20H2
NW20H3
NW20L1
NW20L1F1200, 1600, 2000
NW32H1
NW32H2NW32H3 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200
NW32L1 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200,
NW40H2
NW40H3NW40L1 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000
NW50H2
NW50H3NW50L1 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000, 5000
NT08N1 100, 250, 400, 600, 800
Action Time
Spring charging motor (MCH)
Response time
Charging time
70–80 milliseconds
3–4 seconds (max)
Shunt trip (MX) 50 milliseconds
Shunt close (XF) 70–80 milliseconds
Action Power Consumption
Spring Charging Motor Current (electrically operated circuit breakers) 180 VA
Closing coil (XF) 4.5 VA
Shunt trip coil (MX) 4.5 VA
Time delay under/voltage trip (MN) 20 VA
Status indicating lights (each) 2 VA
Circuit monitor 22 VA
Strip heater (each) 125 VA
Action Ampere (240 V)
Auxiliary switch (OF) 10 A
Overcurrent trip switch (SDE) 10 A
Combined (connect/close) switch (EF) 10 A
Cradle cell switch 10 A
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
4111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Key Interlock Operation
As shown in the example below, a main-tie-main manual key interlock scheme is designed to keep all three circuit breakers from being closed simultaneously. Only two of the three circuit breakers can be closed simultaneously.
NOTE: Spare keys should be removed and kept safely stored and under the control of responsible supervision.
Figure 22: Main-Tie-Main Key Interlocking
Main 1 and main 2 circuit breakers are closed with their keys placed in the lock cylinders. The tie circuit breaker is locked open; a key is required to unlock it and put the circuit breaker into service.
The main 1 circuit breaker is opened and taken out of service. It is locked open, permitting key A1 to be removed to operate the lock associated with the tie circuit breaker. Then the main 1 circuit breaker cannot be put into service and closed until either the tie circuit breaker, or the main 2 circuit breaker, is opened and locked out of service. This would free one key for use in unlocking the main 1 circuit breaker.
Micrologic Trip Units
Micrologic® trip unit ratings, functionality, and curves are listed below.
Ratings
Standard Micrologic adjustable trip settings, including time/current characteristics, pickup settings, pickup points, and time band in seconds are listed below.
Main 1
circuit breaker
Key held
Tie
circuit breaker
A1
LO
A|1
LCMain 2
circuit breaker
Key held
LC
A|1
Time/Current Characteristic
Pickup Setting Pickup Point a
a In = Sensor Plug Value Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting X In
Time Band, Seconds
Long-time Delay 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.625, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0
In Times Long-time Delay Setting
0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24(at 6 times pickup value)
Instantaneous 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 15, OFF In Times Instantaneous Setting
Short-time Delay 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,10 Ir Times Short-time Delay Setting
0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 (Flat Response)
0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 (I2t Response)
Ground FaultA (0.3), B (0.3), C (0.4), D (0.5), E (0.6),F (0.7), G (0.8), H (0.9), J(1.0) (1200 A Max.)
In Times Ground Fault Setting
0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 (Flat Response)
0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 (I2t Response)
42© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Functionality
The table below lists the standard and optional trip unit features for Micrologic Type A (Ammeter), Type P (Power Metering), and Type H (Harmonics) trip units for use in Power-Zone 4 switchgear.
Functions Basic Type A Type P Type H
True RMS sensing X X X X
LI trip configuration X X X X
LSI O O X X
LSIG/ground fault trip – O X X
Ground fault alarm (no trip) – – X X
Ground fault trip and programming alarm – – O O
Adjustable rating plugs X X X X
LED – long–time pickup X X X X
LED – trip indication – X X X
Digital ammeter – X X X
Phase loading bar graph – X X X
Zone selective interlocking – X X X
Communications – O X X
LCD dot matrix display – – X X
Advanced user interface – – X X
Protective relay functions – – X X
Thermal imaging – – X X
Contact wear indication – – X X
Temperature indication – – X X
Incremental fine tuning of settings – – X X
Selective long-time delay bands – – X X
Power measurement – – X X
Waveform capture – – – X
Data logging – – – X
Table Values:
– Not Applicable
X Standard Feature
O Optional Feature
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
4311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Trip Curves
This section contains typical characteristic trip curves for Micrologic trip units in Power-Zone 4 switchgear. Detailed information about Micrologic trip units can be found in the Masterpact NW circuit breaker catalog.
• “Typical Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Units with Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay (Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON / In < 400 A)” on page 44
• “Typical Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Units with Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay (Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON / 400 A < In < 1200 A)” on page 45
• “Typical Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Units with Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay (Ground fault I2t OFF and ON / In > 1200A)” on page 46
• “Typical Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units (Long-time Pickup and Delay / Short-time Pickup and I2t OFF Delay)” on page 47
• “Typical Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units (Short-time Pickup and I2t ON Delay)” on page 48
• “Typical Micrologic 3.0 A Trip Unit (Long-time Pickup and Delay)” on page 49
• “Typical Micrologic 5.0/6.0 Trip Units (instantaneous Pickup, 2X to 15X and OFF)” on page 50
• “Typical Micrologic 3.0 A Trip Unit (Instantaneous Pickup, 1.5X to 12X)” on page 51
• “Typical Micrologic 2.0 A Trip Unit (Long-time Pickup and Delay / Short-time Pickup and Delay)” on page 52
• “Micrologic 2.0/3.0/5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Unit Instantaneous Override Values” on page 53
44© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Figure 23: Typical Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Units with Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay (Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON / In < 400 A)
.15.1
.1
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)Curve No. 0613TC0001Drawing No. B48095-613-01
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.15
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
0.4 ON0.3 ON
0.2 ON
0.1 ON
0.4 OFF
0.3 OFF
0.2 OFF
0.1 OFF
0
GROUND-FAULTDELAY BANDS
I2t ON
GROUND-FAULTPICKUP
x In
GROUND-FAULTDELAY BANDS
I2t OFF(FIXED DELAY)
DELAYSECONDS AT 1 x In
0.10.20.30.4
MAXIMUMUNRESTRAINEDGROUND-FAULT
DELAY
0.5 0.7 0.9
0.4
0.6 0.8 1.0
0.3
MICROLOGIC 6.0 A/P/H Trip Unitswith Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-1
Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON
In ≤ 400 A
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
B48
095-
613-
01.e
ps
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
4511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 24: Typical Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Units with Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay (Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON / 400 A < In < 1200 A)
.15.1
.1MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.15
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
0.2
0.2 ON0.4 ON
0.3 ON
0.1 ON
0.4 OFF
0.3 OFF
0.2 OFF
0.1 OFF
0
GROUND-FAULTDELAY BANDS
I2t ON
GROUND-FAULTPICKUP
x In
GROUND-FAULTDELAY BANDS
I2t OFF(FIXED DELAY)
DELAYSECONDS AT 1 x In
0.10.20.30.4
MAXIMUMUNRESTRAINEDGROUND-FAULT
DELAY
0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9
0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Curve No. 0613TC0002Drawing No. B48095-613-02
Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Unitswith Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-2
Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON
400 A < In ≤ 1200 A
B48095-613-02.eps
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
46© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Figure 25: Typical Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Units with Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay (Ground fault I2t OFF and ON / In > 1200A)
.15.1
.1AMPERES x 103
AMPERES x 103
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.15
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
0.1 ON0.3 ON
0.4 ON0.2 ON
0.4 OFF
500
A
720
A 1040
A12
00 A
880
A
640
A
800
A96
0 A
1120
A
0.3 OFF
0.2 OFF
0.1 OFF
0
GROUND-FAULTDELAY BANDS
I2t ON
GROUND-FAULTPICKUP
x In
GROUND-FAULTDELAY BANDS
I2t OFF(FIXED DELAY)
DELAYSECONDS AT 1 x In
0.10.20.30.4
MAXIMUMUNRESTRAINEDGROUND-FAULT
DELAY
Curve No. 0613TC0003Drawing No. B48095-613-03
Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Unitswith Adjustable Ground-fault Pickup and Delay
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-3
Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON
In > 1200 A
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
B48
095-
613-
03.e
ps
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
4711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 26: Typical Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units (Long-time Pickup and Delay / Short-time Pickup and I2t OFF Delay)
1.51
1
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
24
20
.5
24
16
128
8
6
4
2.51.5 2
3 5
10
4
2
1
16
0.4 OFF
0.3 OFF
0.2 OFF
0.1 OFF
0
LONG-TIME PICKUPx In = Ir
LONG-TIMEDELAY BANDS
SECONDS AT 6 x Ir
MAXIMUMUNRESTRAINED
SHORT-TIMEDELAY
SHORT-TIMEDELAY I2t OFF
(FIXED-TIME DELAY)SECONDS AT 10 x Ir
SHORT-TIMEPICKUP
x Ir
Curve No. 0613TC0004Drawing No. B48095-613-04
B48
095-
613-
04.e
ps
Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-4
Long-time Pickup and DelayShort-time Pickup and I2t OFF Delay
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
NOTE:
1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal-imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload. Approximately twenty minutes is required between overloads to completely reset thermal-imaging.
2. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.
3. With zone-selective interlocking ON, short-time delay utilized, and no restraining signal, the maximum unrestrained short-time delay time band applies regardless of the setting.
4. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of the current.
5. For a withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can be turned OFF. See trip curve 613-7 for instantaneous trip curve. See trip curve 613-10 for instantaneous override values.
6. Overload indicator illuminates at 100%.
48© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Figure 27: Typical Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units (Short-time Pickup and I2t ON Delay)
1.51
1
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
2.52
3 4 5
6 8 101.5
0.4 ON
0.4 ON
0.2 ON
0.3 ON
0.1 ON
0.3 ON
0.2 ON
0.1 ON
SHORT-TIMEDELAY I2t ON
SECONDS AT 10 x Ir
SHORT-TIMEPICKUP
x Ir
MAXIMUMUNRESTRAINED
SHORT-TIMEDELAY
Curve No. 0613TC0005Drawing No. B48095-613-05
Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-5
Short-time Pickup and I2t ON Delay
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
NOTE:
1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal-imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload. Approximately twenty minutes is required between overloads to completely reset thermal-imaging.
2. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.
3. With zone-selective interlocking ON, short-time delay utilized, and no restraining signal, the maximum unrestrained short-time delay time band applies regardless of the setting.
4. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of current.
5. For withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can be turned OFF. See trip curve 613-7 for instantaneous trip curve. See trip curve 613-10 for instantaneous override values.
6. See Trip Curve 613-4 for long-time pickup and delay trip curve.
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
4911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 28: Typical Micrologic 3.0 A Trip Unit (Long-time Pickup and Delay)g g p g p y
1.51
1CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
24
2012
.5
8
42
1
16
24
16
LONG-TIME PICKUPx In = Ir
LONG-TIME DELAYSECONDS AT 6 x Ir
Curve No. 0613TC0006Drawing No. B48095-613-06
Micrologic 3.0A Trip Unit
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-6
Long-time Pickup and Delay
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
NOTE:
1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal-imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload. Approximately twenty minutes is required between overloads to completely reset thermal-imaging.
2. The end of the curve is determined by the instantaneous setting of the circuit breaker.
3. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of current.
4. See trip curve 613-8 for instantaneous pickup trip curve.
50© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Figure 29: Typical Micrologic 5.0/6.0 Trip Units (instantaneous Pickup, 2X to 15X and OFF)
1.51
1
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
INSTANTANEOUSPICKUP
x In
10 x
2 x 3 x 4 x 6 x 8 x 12 x 15 x
Curve No. 0613TC0007Drawing No. B48095-613-07
Micrologic 5.0/6.0 Trip Units
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-7
Instantaneous Pickup, 2X to 15X and OFF
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
NOTE:
1. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.
2. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of current.
3. The instantaneous region of the trip curve shows maximum total clearing times. Actual clearing times in this region can vary depending on the circuit breaker mechanism design and other factors. The actual clearing time can be considerably faster than indicated. Contact your local sales office for additional information.
4. For a withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can be turned OFF. See trip curve 613-7 for the instantaneous trip curve. See trip curve 613-10 for the instantaneous override values.
5. See trip curve 613-4 and trip curve 613-5 for long-time pickup, long-time delay, short-time pickup and short-time delay trip curves.
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
5111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 30: Typical Micrologic 3.0 A Trip Unit (Instantaneous Pickup, 1.5X to 12X)
1.51
1MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
1.5 x
INSTANTANEOUSPICKUP
x In
5 x 10 x
2 x 3 x 4 x 6 x 8 x 12 x
Curve No. 0613TC0008Drawing No. B48095-613-08
Micrologic 3.0A Trip Unit
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-8
Instantaneous Pickup, 1.5X to 12X
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
NOTE:
1. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.
2. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of current.
3. The instantaneous region of the trip curve shows maximum total clearing times. Actual clearing times in this region can vary depending on the circuit breaker mechanism design and other factors. The actual clearing time can be considerably faster than indicated. Contact your local sales office for additional information.
4. See trip curve 613-6 for long-time pickup and delay trip curves.
52© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Figure 31: Typical Micrologic 2.0 A Trip Unit (Long-time Pickup and Delay / Short-time Pickup and Delay)
1.51
1
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
600
700
8009001000
1500
2000
3000
4000
6000
7000
80009000
5000
10000
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09.1
.005
.006
.007
.008
.009
.01
.015
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.91
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8910
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090
100
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
8090100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
80009000
10000
TIM
E IN
SE
CO
ND
S
CYCLE21
1 CYCLE
150
24
20
.5
16
128
2.51.5 2
4
3 5
6
8
10
4
2
1
16
LONG-TIME PICKUPx In = Ir
LONG-TIMEDELAY BANDS
SECONDS AT 6 x Ir
SHORT-TIMEPICKUP
x Ir
24
Curve No. 0613TC0009Drawing No. B48095-613-09
Micrologic 2.0A Trip Unit
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-9
Long-time Pickup and DelayShort-time Pickup with No Delay
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) ambient temperature.
NOTE:
1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal-imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload. Approximately twenty minutes is required between overloads to completely reset thermal-imaging.
2. The end of the curve is determined by the short-time setting.
3. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of current.
4. Overload indicator illuminates at 100%.
B48
095-
613-
09.e
ps
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
5311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 32: Micrologic 2.0/3.0/5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Unit Instantaneous Override Values
MASTERPACT NW/NT
a Maximum sensor plug 250 A
ANSI CBModel No.
Inst.Override(kA RMS)+/- 10%
NW08N1 a 24NW08N1 NoneNW16N1 NoneNW08H1 a 24NW08H1 NoneNW16H1 NoneNW20H1 NoneNW32H1 NoneNW08H2 a 24NW08H2 NoneNW16H2 NoneNW20H2 NoneNW32H2 NoneNW40H2 NoneNW50H2 NoneNW08H3 a 24NW08H3 85NW16H3 85NW20H3 85NW32H3 85NW40H3 85NW50H3 85NW08L1 a 24NW08L1 35NW08L1F 24NW16L1 35NW16L1F 24NW20L1 35NW20L1F 24NW32L1 117NW40L1 117NW50L1 117
NT08N1 a 24
Instantaneous Override Values
Note:
Faults at or above instantaneous override valuewill be cleared at 20 msec or less .
54© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Selection Tables with Transformer Ratings
Transformer ratings for Masterpact NW circuit breakers in Power-Zone 4 switchgear are listed below.
Table 6: Application of Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers (with Standard Three-Phase Transformers: Liquid Filled and Ventilated Dry Types)
Transformer Base(100%) Rating
Secondary Short-Circuit CurrentsRMS Symmetrical Amperes
Minimum Size Circuit Breakers for Selective Trip Systems
kVA and PercentImpedance Amperes a
Max. Short-circuit kVA Available from Primary System
Through TransformerOnly
Motor Contribution Combined
Main Circuit BreakerShort-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker Short-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker InstantaneousTrip
208 V Three-Phase - 50% Motor Load / xd" = 25%b
300
5.0%833
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
14900
15700
16000
16300
16500
16700
1700
16600
17400
17700
18000
18200
18400
NW16N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
500
5.0%1389
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
23100
25200
26000
26700
27200
27800
2800
25900
28000
28800
29500
30000
30600
NW16N1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08H1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08H1
NT08N1
750
5.75%2083
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
28700
32000
33300
34400
35200
36200
4200
32900
36200
37500
38600
39400
40400
NW32H1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
1000
5.75%2778 50000 35900 5600 41500 N32H1c NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
1000
5.75%2778
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
41200
43300
45200
46700
48300
5600
46800
48900
50800
52300
53900
NW32H1c
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
5511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
240 V Three-Phase - 100% Motor Load / xd" = 25%b
300
5.0%722
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
12900
13600
13900
14100
14300
14400
2900
15800
16500
16800
17000
17200
17300
NW08N1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NT08N1
500
5.0%1203
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
20000
21900
22500
23100
23600
24100
4800
24800
26700
27300
27900
28400
28900
NW16N1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
750
5.75%1804
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
24800
27800
28900
29800
30600
31400
7200
32100
35000
36100
37000
37800
38600
NW20H1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
1000
5.75%2406 50000 31000 9600 40600 N32H1c NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
1000
5.75%2406
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
35600
37500
39100
40400
41800
9600
45200
47100
48700
50000
51400
NW32H1c
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
Table 6: Application of Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers (with Standard Three-Phase Transformers: Liquid Filled and Ventilated Dry Types)
Transformer Base(100%) Rating
Secondary Short-Circuit CurrentsRMS Symmetrical Amperes
Minimum Size Circuit Breakers for Selective Trip Systems
kVA and PercentImpedance Amperes a
Max. Short-circuit kVA Available from Primary System
Through TransformerOnly
Motor Contribution Combined
Main Circuit BreakerShort-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker Short-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker InstantaneousTrip
56© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
480 V Three-Phase - 100% Motor Load / xd" = 25%b
500
5.0%601
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
10000
10900
11300
11600
11800
12000
2400
12400
13300
13700
14000
14200
14400
NW08N1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
750
5.75%902
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
12400
13900
14400
14900
15300
15700
3600
16000
17500
18000
18500
18900
19300
NW16N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
1000
5.75%1203
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
15500
17800
18700
19600
30200
20900
4800
20300
22600
23500
24400
25000
25700
NW16N1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
1500
5.75%1804
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
20600
24900
26700
28400
29800
31400
7200
27800
32100
33900
35600
37000
38600
NW20H1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
2000
5.75%2406
50000
10000
24700
310009600
34300
40600NW32H1c NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
2000
5.75%2406
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
34000
36700
39100
41800
9600
43600
46300
48700
51400
NW32H1c
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
2500 3008 50000 28000 40000NW08N1
NT08N1
NW08N1
NT08N1
2500
5.75%3008
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
28000
36500
40500
44600
48100
52300
12000
40000
48500
52500
56600
60100
64300
NW32H1c
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
Table 6: Application of Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers (with Standard Three-Phase Transformers: Liquid Filled and Ventilated Dry Types)
Transformer Base(100%) Rating
Secondary Short-Circuit CurrentsRMS Symmetrical Amperes
Minimum Size Circuit Breakers for Selective Trip Systems
kVA and PercentImpedance Amperes a
Max. Short-circuit kVA Available from Primary System
Through TransformerOnly
Motor Contribution Combined
Main Circuit BreakerShort-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker Short-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker InstantaneousTrip
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
5711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
3000
5.75%3609
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
30700
41200
46600
51900
56800
62800
14000
44700
55200
60600
65900
70800
76800
NW40H2c
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H2
NW08H2
NW08H2
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H2
NW08H2
NW08H2
3750
5.75%4511
50000
100000
150000
250000
34000
47500
54700
62200
18000
52000
65500
72700
80200
NW50H2
NW08H1
NW08H2
NW08H2
NW08H2
NW08H1
NW08H2
NW08H2
NW08H2
3750
5.75%4511
500000
Unlimited
69400
7850018000
87400
96500NW50H3
NW08H3
NW08H3
NW08H3
NW08H3
Table 6: Application of Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers (with Standard Three-Phase Transformers: Liquid Filled and Ventilated Dry Types)
Transformer Base(100%) Rating
Secondary Short-Circuit CurrentsRMS Symmetrical Amperes
Minimum Size Circuit Breakers for Selective Trip Systems
kVA and PercentImpedance Amperes a
Max. Short-circuit kVA Available from Primary System
Through TransformerOnly
Motor Contribution Combined
Main Circuit BreakerShort-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker Short-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker InstantaneousTrip
58© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
600 V Three-Phase - 100% Motor Load / xd" = 25%b
500
5.0%481
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
8000
8700
9000
9300
9400
9600
1900
9900
10600
10900
11200
11300
11500
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
750
5.75%722
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
10000
11100
11600
11900
12200
12600
2900
12900
14000
14500
14800
15100
15500
NW08N1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
1000
5.75%962
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
12400
14300
15000
15600
16200
16700
3900
16300
18200
18900
19500
30100
20600
NW16N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
1500
5.75%1443
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
16500
20000
21400
22700
23900
25100
5800
22300
25800
27200
28500
29700
30900
NW16N1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
2000
5.75%1924
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
19700
24800
27200
29400
31300
33500
7700
27400
32500
34900
37100
39000
41200
NW20H1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
2500
5.75%2406
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
22400
29200
32400
35600
38500
41800
9600
32000
38800
42000
45200
48100
51400
NW32H1c
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08N1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
3000
5.75%2886
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
24600
33000
37300
41500
45500
50200
11500
36100
44500
48800
53000
57000
61700
NW32H1c
NW08N1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08N1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
Table 6: Application of Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers (with Standard Three-Phase Transformers: Liquid Filled and Ventilated Dry Types)
Transformer Base(100%) Rating
Secondary Short-Circuit CurrentsRMS Symmetrical Amperes
Minimum Size Circuit Breakers for Selective Trip Systems
kVA and PercentImpedance Amperes a
Max. Short-circuit kVA Available from Primary System
Through TransformerOnly
Motor Contribution Combined
Main Circuit BreakerShort-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker Short-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker InstantaneousTrip
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
5911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
3750
5.75%3608
50000
100000
150000
250000
500000
Unlimited
27200
38000
43700
49800
55500
62800
14400
41600
52400
58100
64200
69900
77200
NW40H2c
NW08N1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H2
NW08H2
NW08N1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H1
NW08H2
NW08H2
a At transformer base rating.b Subtransient reactance.c Next larger frame size main circuit breaker may be required for 55/65 ×C rise and/or forced air–cooled (FA) transformer.
Check Transformer Secondary Ampere Rating.
Table 6: Application of Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers (with Standard Three-Phase Transformers: Liquid Filled and Ventilated Dry Types)
Transformer Base(100%) Rating
Secondary Short-Circuit CurrentsRMS Symmetrical Amperes
Minimum Size Circuit Breakers for Selective Trip Systems
kVA and PercentImpedance Amperes a
Max. Short-circuit kVA Available from Primary System
Through TransformerOnly
Motor Contribution Combined
Main Circuit BreakerShort-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker Short-time Delay Trip
Feeder Circuit Breaker InstantaneousTrip
60© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Distribution Systems
This section contains a brief overview of Wye and Delta distribution systems.
Wye Solidly Grounded Systems
A Wye system is the most common type of three-phase distribution system for low voltage switchgear. Wye systems are either three- or four-wire distribution systems that are grounded, either in the equipment (see “Four-Wire Wye Distribution—Solidly Grounded System - 3 phase, 4 wire”), or at the transformer source (see “Three-Wire Wye Distribution—Solidly Grounded System - 3 phase, 3 wire”).
Figure 33: Four-Wire Wye Distribution—Solidly Grounded System - 3 phase, 4 wire
Figure 34: Three-Wire Wye Distribution—Solidly Grounded System - 3 phase, 3 wire
When the system is grounded in the equipment and the neutral phase is carried through the equipment, the system is described as a four-wire solidly grounded system with neutral connections available to supply single phase-to-neutral loads, such as lighting loads.
When the system is grounded at the transformer source and no neutral phase is carried through the equipment, the system is described as a three-wire solidly grounded system. No neutral connections are available; all loads must be three-phase (or single “phase-to-phase”) loads.
In some cases, the neutral is delivered to the service entrance where it is bonded to ground similar to the four-wire solidly grounded system.
SwitchgearTransformer
SwitchgearTransformer
Optional neutral
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
6111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Delta Grounded and Ungrounded Systems
Formerly common, Delta three-wire systems are rarely used in low voltage distribution systems. Delta three-wire distribution systems can be grounded or ungrounded services. Generally, Delta systems are ungrounded. In some cases, they are grounded on the “corner” of the delta or some other point. Ungrounded Delta systems do not have a reference point or ground. Corner or Grounded B Phase Delta distribution systems do provide a reference point but require one phase to be connected to the ground.
Low voltage drawout switchgear with Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers is designed and built to ANSI C37.20.1 and is tested for single phase-to-phase faults. They can be applied on “corner” grounded Delta distribution systems. Power-Zone 4 switchgear with Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers is suited for corner grounded or ungrounded systems.
Figure 35: Three-Wire Delta Distribution—Ungrounded - 3 phase, 3 wire
Although ungrounded systems have been used for many years, they are not recommended in newly designed low voltage distribution systems. Ungrounded power systems may be unstable. High resistance grounded systems as shown on pages 65 and 66 are recommended for use in newly designed low voltage distribution systems.
Ground Fault Protection for Wye Systems
The need for ground fault protection in three-phase solidly grounded Wye systems is due to the possibility of low magnitude ground fault currents. Phase-to-phase faults are of such a large magnitude that overcurrent protection devices (trip units) can operate rapidly and positively to signal the circuit breaker to open. Ground faults can be of a much lower magnitude and require specialized elements in the trip unit for detection.
Power-Zone® 4 switchgear with Masterpact® NW and NT circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic® trip units has the capability of providing ground fault sensing (alarm with no tripping) and ground fault protection (tripping) on three-phase, three-wire and three-phase, four-wire solidly-grounded systems. Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers can be used for overcurrent protection on ungrounded or resistance grounded systems, but are not suitable for ground fault protection on these systems.
62© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Ground faults are an inadvertent flow of current between the normal current-carrying conductors and ground. These ground faults usually start at a low level and, if left undetected, escalate causing significant heat and mechanical damage to the electrical system. Ground faults can escalate to a phase-to-phase fault causing major system damage. The ground fault system in the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers monitors the flow of current in the system and detects ground fault currents. The circuit breaker will trip to protect the circuit, or send an alarm through the appropriate interface equipment, depending on the option installed.
Figure 36: Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker Ground Fault System Sensing Capabilities
The National Electrical Code (NEC) requires ground fault protection on solidly grounded Wye electrical services of more than 150 V to ground, but not exceeding 600 V phase-to-phase for each service disconnect rated 1000 A or more. This includes service entrance, feeders and building disconnects. The NEC also requires ground fault alarm (no tripping) on emergency systems and allows ground fault alarm on continuous processes, fire pumps, and other circuits that would be more hazardous if stopped without an orderly shutdown.
Ground Fault Protection with Tripping
Ground fault protection is available as an option on Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers with Micrologic 6.0A and higher trip units. Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers offer three different ground fault sensing options: residual, ground-source return and modified differential. The sensing options make it possible to match the number and location of current sensors to the application. The pickup and delay settings for ground fault are adjustable locally with the dial settings or through the key pad. The pickup and delay settings for ground fault are also adjustable remotely over a computer network on Micrologic 6.0 and higher trip units. A neutral current sensor (NCT) must be installed in the neutral if ground fault alarm is used on a three-phase, four-wire system.
Ground Fault Protection without Tripping
All Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers with Micrologic 5.0P and higher trip units come standard with the ability to sense and report a ground fault alarm through the optional programmable contact module or communication network. A neutral current sensor (NCT) must be installed in the neutral if ground fault alarm is used on a three-phase, four-wire system.
The pickup and delay settings for the ground fault alarm are adjustable locally through the key pad on the trip unit or remotely over a computer network.
Circuit breaker
Trip unit
A
B
C
N
Current sensor
Ground fault current
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
6311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Residual Ground Fault Sensing
Residual ground fault sensing systems use one current sensor for each current-carrying conductor. The trip unit vectorially sums the secondary outputs from each sensor to determine if there is a ground fault and the magnitude of the ground fault. The following diagram shows the current sensors for a three-phase, four-wire system. There is a current sensor on each phase and the neutral.
Figure 37: Typical Residual Ground Fault Sensing System with Phase Conductors
The sensors for the phase conductors A, B and C are inside the circuit breaker. The neutral current transformer is installed in the neutral circuit. If the circuit breaker were used on a three-phase, three-wire system, the neutral current transformer would not be necessary.
Ground Source Return
Ground source return ground fault sensing systems use one current sensor on the ground conductor. The current sensor measures the ground current flow. The following diagram shows the current sensor for a three-phase, four-wire system. Ground source return can also be used on three-phase, three-wire systems.
Figure 38: Typical Ground Source Return Sensing System with Ground Fault Interface Module and Current Sensor
Ground-source return sensing systems require the use of the optional ground fault interface module and a sensor installed in the ground circuit.
Circuit breaker
Trip unit
A
B
C
N
Current sensor
Trip unit
A
B
C
N
Current sensor
Ground fault interface module
➀ Minimum #14 AWG wire. Wiring must be shielded cable or twisted pair. Maximum of 500 ft (152.4 m) between ground fault interface module and current sensors.
➁ Minimum #14 AWG wire.Wiring must be shielded cable or twisted pair.Maximum of 32 ft. (10.0 m) between ground fault interface module and trip unit.
Circuit breaker
1
2
64© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
The current sensor and ground fault interface module must be wired per the installation and wiring instructions included with the ground fault interface module.
Modified Differential Ground Fault System
A modified differential ground fault system (MDGF) is used for multiple sourced systems. Normal residual and ground-source return systems will not correctly sum all of the circulating currents caused by the multiple neutral paths and multiple grounds. The following diagram shows a typical main-tie-main system. Each source transformer is grounded, and the service entrance neutral is bonded to ground. Multiple neutral paths allow neutral current to circulate and return to the supplying transformer by several different paths. The ground fault system must be capable of correctly summing these circulating currents.
Figure 39: Typical Modified Differential Ground Fault System with Ground Fault Interface Modules
The modified differential ground fault sensing system requires the use of ground fault interface modules and current sensors installed in all normal current-carrying conductors.
The current sensors and ground fault interface modules must be wired in parallel and the polarity of the current sensors must be maintained per the installation and wiring instructions included with the ground fault interface module.
➀ Minimum #14 AWG wire. Wiring must be shielded cable or twisted pair. Maximum of 500 ft (152.4 m) between ground fault interface module and current sensors.
➁ Minimum #14 AWG wire.Wiring must be shielded cable or twisted pair.Maximum of 32 ft. (10.0 m) between ground fault interface module and trip unit.
Source B
A
2
1
2
1
1
2
Source A
B C N N C B A
Feeder Loads (Bus B)Feeder Loads (Bus A)
Ground fault interface modules
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
6511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
High Resistance Grounded Systems
When continuance of service for a distribution system is a high priority, high-resistance grounding adds the features of a grounded system on an ungrounded system, while minimizing the risk of service interruptions resulting from ground faults.
High resistance grounding simultaneously provides a system reference point (or ground) to overcome the negative effects of low level ground faults and limits the magnitude of current that can flow during a ground fault. A resistance value is selected to limit the overvoltage during arcing faults. Industry practice has established that the resistance value should be selected relative to the system capacitive charging current.
An ammeter, in the circuit of a grounding resistor/grounding transformer assembly, reads the total amount of the ground current flowing through the system. When a current-sensing relay is added, any levels in excess of the capacitive charging current can be monitored. Alternatively, a voltmeter-relay can be connected across ground resistors to monitor the capacitive charging current in a resistor/grounding transformer assembly. The ground current ammeter provides a linear reading of the existent ac ground current present in the system for both the current and voltage detection methods described above.
Circuit breakers rated to C37.13 are recommended for high resistance grounded systems. Power-Zone 4 switchgear with Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers is rated to C37.13.
Wye Systems Configured
High resistance grounding for Wye-connected systems is established by placing resistors in series with the neutral-to-ground connection of the power source. Grounding resistors are chosen to limit the ground current to a maximum value of five amperes. Line-to-neutral loads cannot be connected to a system where the neutral is resistance-grounded. For additional information, see 2005 NEC 250.36.
Figure 40: Four-Wire Wye System Fault Detection with Current Relay
600 (max.) Wye
To distribution equipment
Grounding resistor
Test resistor
High-resistance grounding assembly
Pulse resistor
Contactor
Control circuit
CLF
CLF
CLF
A CN B
AM 51N
G
WRG
66© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Delta Systems Configured
A neutral point must be established in an ungrounded Delta-connected system using three single-phase transformers. Typically, grounding resistors and transformers are chosen to limit the ground current to a maximum value of five amperes. This technique can be applied on Wye-connected sources when the neutral point is not accessible from the service entrance conduit. The neutral point cannot be used to service phase-to-neutral loads.
Figure 41: Three-Wire Delta System with Zig Zag Grounding Transformers
600 V (max.) Delta
To distribution equipment
CLF
CLF
CLF
WRG
51NAM
Control circuit
High-resistance grounding assembly
Zig-zag connected
or Y–
grounding transformers
G
A B C
Grounding resistor
Test resistor
Pulse resistor
Contactor
Power-Zone® 4Technical Overview
6711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Automatic Transfer Systems
Automatic transfer systems minimize power interruption by transferring the load from the normal source to an alternate source when the normal source is temporarily unavailable. The system uses multiple connections to power sources, usually utility sources, and a programmable logic controller (PLC) to achieve this transfer. These systems also feature redundant supplies of control power. Examples of automatic transfer systems with main-main circuit breakers and main-tie-main circuit breakers are shown in Figure 42: below and Figure 43: on page 68.
Main-Main Circuit Breakers
Each main circuit breaker connects to a utility source. When the normal source becomes unavailable, the system transfers to the alternate. If the system comes equipped with a preferred source selector option, the system reverts to the preferred source automatically once it is available. Without the selector, automatic retransfer does not occur.
Optional listing to UL 1008 for both closed and open transition transfer schemes is available. When an open transition UL 1008 listed transfer scheme is specified, a mechanical interlocking cable is provided between the two main circuit breakers (main-main) to assure that at least one breaker is always open. This way, one circuit breaker is open prior to closing the other main.
Figure 42: Main-Main Circuit Breaker Configuration
Utility source #1 Utility source #2
Left main
circuit breaker
(normal source)
PLC
Common load
Right main
circuit breaker
(alternate source)
68© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Technical Overview
Main-Tie-Main Circuit Breakers
Both main circuit breakers, connected to a utility source, are connected together by means of a normally open tie circuit breaker. Each main circuit breaker feeds independent load buses. Various settings of the preferred source selector switch and the retransfer on/off options determine which circuit breakers are closed during various operating conditions.
Figure 43: Main-Tie-Main Circuit Breaker Configuration
Special Applications
This section contains information regarding low voltage systems in seismic and high altitude applications.
Seismic Applications
Power-Zone 4 switchgear has been tested for applications according to Uniform Building Code (UBC) zone 4 requirements. Equipment must be anchored properly to fully comply with zone 4 installations. Additional information can be found in Bulletin No. 80298-002-05, Power-Zone 4 Low Voltage, Metal-Enclosed, Drawout Switchgear with Masterpact® Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers.
High Altitude Applications
When Power-Zone 4 switchgear with Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers is installed at a location greater than 6600 feet above sea level, the ratings must be de-rated.
NOTE: Ref. ANSI C37.20.1, Table 10.
Utility #2Utility #1
PLC
Tie circuit breaker
(normally open)
Load #1 Load #2
Left main
circuit breaker
(normally closed)
Right main
circuit breaker
(normally closed)
Altitude Voltage Amps
6600 ft (2,000 m) and below 100% 100%
8500 ft (2,600 m) 95% 99%
13000 ft (3,900 m) 80% 96%
Power-Zone® 4Wiring Diagrams
6911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
SECTION 4 : WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION CONTENTS
“Basic Electrically Operated Circuit Breaker Diagrams” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70“Masterpact NW/NT Alarm and Cradle Contacts” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70“Masterpact NW/NT Power, Trip Unit, and Remote Operation” . . . . . . 72
70© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Wiring Diagrams
BASIC ELECTRICALLY OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER DIAGRAMS
This section contains Masterpact® NW and NT circuit breaker diagrams. Refer to the Masterpact NT/NW Universal Power Circuit Breakers catalog for additional information.
Masterpact NW/NT Alarm and Cradle Contacts
Figure 44: Masterpact NW Alarm and Cradle Contacts
822
824
821
812
814
811
832
834
831
CD3
Disconnected
CD2 CD1
331
332
334
CE3
Connected
321
322
324
CE2
311
312
314
CE1
914
912
911
924
922
921
CT3
934
932
931
CT2 CT1
Test position
OF . .
Closed
Connectedclosed
OF . .
CE
EF
Not connected or connectedand open
or
. . 1
. . 2
. . 4
. . 6
. . 8
. . 5
12 1411
22 2432 3431 21
OF4
42 4441
OF3 OF2 OF1
Open Closed
Alarm contacts Cradle contacts
OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11
124 114
122 112
121 111
OF24 OF23 OF22
234 224
232 222
231 221
244
242
241
144 134
142 132
141 131
214
212
211
OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11
128 118
126 116
125 115
OF24 OF23 OF22
238 228
236 226
235 225
248
246
245
148 138
146 136
145 135
218
216
215
OU OU OU OU OU OU OU OU
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1
24 14
22 12
21 11
44 34
42 32
41 31OU OU
CE9 CE8 CE7
384 374
382 372
381 371
394
392
391
CE6 CE5 CE4
344
342
341
364 354
362 352
361 351
CE2 CE1 CT3 CT2 CT1
924 914
922 912
921 911
CD3 CD2 CD1 CE3
814 334
812 332
811 331
834 824
832 822
831 821
314 934
312 932
311 931
324
322
321
Power-Zone® 4Wiring Diagrams
7111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 45: Masterpact NT Alarm and Cradle Contacts
NW/NT Circuit Breaker Alarm and Cradle Contacts
NOTE: OF1, OF2, OF3 and OF4 contacts are standard equipment.
CE2 CE1 CT1CD2 CD1 CE3
814 334
812 332
811 331
824
822
821
314 914
312 912
311 911
324
322
321
822
824
821
812
814
811
Disconnected
CD2 CD1
331
332
334
CE3
Connected
321
322
324
CE2
311
312
314
CE1
914
912
911
CT1
Test position
12 1411
22 2432 3431 21
OF4
42 4441
OF3 OF2 OF1
Open Closed
Alarm contacts Cradle contacts
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1
24 14
22 12
21 11
44 34
42 32
41 31
Table 7: Alarm Contacts
OF4, OF3
OF2, OF1“Open/close” circuit breaker or switch position contacts
OF24: “Open/close” circuit breaker or switch position contact or EF24: Combined “connected and closed” contact
OF23 or EF23
OF22 or EF22
OF21 or EF21
OF14 or EF14
OF13 or EF13
OF12 or EF12
OF22 or EF22
OF11 or EF11
Table 8: Cradle Contacts
CD3, CD2, CD1 “Disconnected” position contacts CE3, CE2, CE1 “Connected”
position contacts CT3, CT2, CT1 “Test” position contacts
or or
CE6, CE5, CE4 “Connected” position contacts CE9, CE8, CE7 “Connected”
position contacts
or
CD6, CD5, CD4 “Disconnected” position contacts
72© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Wiring Diagrams
Masterpact NW/NT Power, Trip Unit, and Remote Operation
Figure 46: Masterpact NW Power, Trip Unit, and Remote Operation
T4
T3
T2
T1
Z3
Trip unitZ
4
Z3
Z2Z1
Z4,
Z5
Z1
Z2N CBA
Z5
VN
V1
V2
V3
M3
M2
M1
F2+
F1– 47
1
S1
484
S2
474
Q1
Q2
Q3
M6C
M2C M6Cor
Upstream Downstream
oror
181
182
184
SDE2
Faul
t
Faul
t81
82 84
SDE1
K2
Res
K1
PF
252
254
251
Cha
rged
MX1
C2
C3
C1
BPO
A2
A3
A1
BPF
XF
D2
D1
AT
MN MX2
C12
C13
C11 B
1
MCH
B3
B2
Remote operationPower
SDE1
184 K2/
182 /
181 K1/
SDE2 / Res
D2 C12/
/
D1 C11/
84
82
81
C2
C3
C1
A2
A3
A1
254
252
251
B2
B3
B1
MN / MX2 MX1 XF PF MCHCOM UC1 UC2 UC 3 M2C / M6C
E5 E6 Z5 M1 M2 M3 F2+ V3 484 Q3/
E3 E4 Z3 Z4 T3 T4 VN V2 474 Q2/
E1 E2 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 F1- V1 471 Q1/
Trip unit
Power-Zone® 4Wiring Diagrams
7311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 47: Masterpact NT Power, Trip Unit, and Remote Operation
T4
T3
T2
T1
MicrologicZ
4
Z3
Z2
Z1
Z2
Z1N L3L2L1
Q
Z5
VN
V1
V2
V3
M3
M2
M1
F2+
F1
I
V
24 VdcT4
T3
T2
T1
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z2
Z1
Z3
Z4
Z5
Power UpstreamCircuit Breaker
471
S1
474
484
S2
Q1
Q2
Q3
M6C
M2C M6Cor
DownstreamCircuit Breaker
Remote Operation
oror
181
182
184
SDE2
Faul
t
Faul
t81
82 84
SDE1
K2
RES
K1
PF
252
254
251
Cha
rged
MX1
C2
C3
C1
A2
A3
A1
CHXF
D2
D1
MN MX2
C12
C11 B
1
MCH
B3
B2
D2 / C12 C2 A2 254 B2
C13 C3 A3 252 B3
D1 / C11 C1 A1 251 B1
184 / K2 84
182 82
181 / K1 81
SDE2 / RES SDE1 MN / MX2 MX1 XF PF MCH
Remote operationPower
COM UC1 UC2 UC3 UC4 / M2C / M6C
E5 E6 Z5 M1 M2 M3 F2+ V3 / 484 / Q3
E3 E4 Z3 Z4 T3 T4 VN V2 / 474 / Q2
E1 E2 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 F1– V1 / 471 / Q1
Trip unit
74© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Wiring Diagrams
NW/NT Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Remote Operation
NOTE: When networked MX1 or XF coils are used, the third wire (C3, A3) must be connected even if the communications module is not installed.
Table 9: Basic A/P/H Trip Units
Basic A P H Trip Unit
■ ■ ■ ■ Com: E1–E6 communication
■■■■■
■■■■■
■■■■■
UC1:
Z1–Z5 logical selectivityZ1 = ZSI OUTZ2 = ZSI OUT Com; Z3 = ZSI IN ComZ4 = ZSI IN short-time delayZ5 = ZSI IN ground fault
■ ■ ■ UC2: T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral;
■ ■■
■■ UC3: F2+, F1– 24 Vdc external power supply
External neutral VN plug
■ ■ UC4
■
■
■
■
M2C or M6C
Two programmable contacts (internal relay)
Six programmable contacts (for connection to external M6C module)
Table 10: Remote Operation
SDE2orRes
Electrical fault alarm contact
Remote reset
SDE1 Electrical fault alarm contact (standard or over current trip switch)
MN orMX2
Undervoltage trip device
Shunt trip device
MX1 Shunt trip device (standard or networked)
XF Closing coil (standard or networked)
PF Ready-to-close contact
MCH Spring-charging motor
Power-Zone® 4Dimensions
7511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
SECTION 5 : DIMENSIONS
SECTION CONTENTS
“Top and Bottom Conduit Entrance Layouts” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76“System Design” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88“Weights” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
76© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Dimensions
TOP AND BOTTOM CONDUIT ENTRANCE LAYOUTS
Figure 48: Top and Bottom Conduit Entrance Dimensions (22-inch wide)–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
60.00
182972.00
137254.00
17.00
43217.00
1275.00
58423.00
86434.00
432
17.00 432
17.00 432
1524
342.0
1024.00
1275.00
1024.00
1275.00
30512.00
342.0
342.0
1024.00
30512.00
512.00
22.00 559
2038.00
30512.00
83833.00
55922.00
40616.00
642.50
642.50
22.00 559
22.00 559
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
642.50
893.50
893.50
893.50
1.33 1.331.33
Top Conduit Entrance–Auxiliary Section (22-inch wide)
Bottom Conduit Entrance–Auxiliary Section (22-inch wide)
Power-Zone® 4Dimensions
7711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 49: Top and Bottom Conduit Entrance Dimensions (30-inch wide)–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
16.00 406 22.00
559
33.00 838
34 34 34
25.00 635
25.00 635
25.00 635
30.00 762
30.00 762
30.00 762
Top Conduit Entrance–Auxiliary Section (30-inch wide)
Bottom Conduit Entrance–Auxiliary Section (30-inch wide)
2.50 64
25.00 635
2.50 64 25.00
635
2.50 64
25.00 635
54.00 1372
60.00 1524
72.00 1829
17.00 432
23.00 584
34.00 864
5.00 127
5.00 127
5.00 127
4.00 102
4.00 102
4.00 102
12.00 305
12.00 305
12.00 305
2.00 51
2.00 51
2.00 51
78© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Dimensions
Figure 50: Top and Bottom Conduit Entrance Dimensions (36-inch wide)–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
60.00
182972.00
137254.00
31.00
78731.00
1275.00
58423.00
86434.00
787
31.00 787
17.00 432
1524
342.0
1024.00
1275.00
1024.00
1275.00
30512.00
342.0
342.0
1024.00
30512.00
512.00
36.00 914
2038.00
30512.00
83833.00
55922.00
40616.00
642.50
642.50
36.00 914
36.00 914
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
642.50
893.50
893.50
893.50
1.33 1.331.33
Top Conduit Entrance–Auxiliary Section (36-inch wide)
Bottom Conduit Entrance–Auxiliary Section (36-inch wide)
Power-Zone® 4Dimensions
7911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 51: Top and Bottom Conduit Entrance Dimensions (22-inch wide Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections)–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
60.00
182972.00
137254.00
17.00
43217.00
1275.00
38115.00
68627.00
432
17.00 432
9.00 229
1524
342.0
1024.00
1275.00
1024.00
1275.00
30512.00
342.0
342.0
1024.00
30512.00
512.00
22.00 559
2038.00
30512.00
66026.00
35614.00
2038.00
642.50
642.50
22.00 559
22.00 559
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
642.50
893.50
893.50
893.50
1.33 1.331.33
Top Conduit Entrance–Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections (22-inch wide)
Bottom Conduit Entrance–Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections (22-inch wide)
NOTE: Top conduit entrance area is reduced when close-coupled with a transformer.
80© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Dimensions
Figure 52: Top and Bottom Conduit Entrance Dimensions (30-inch wide Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections)–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
2.50 64
25.00 635
2.50 64 25.00
635
2.50 64
25.00 635
54.00 1372
60.00 1524
72.00 1829
9.00 229
15.00 381
27.00 686
5.00 127
5.00 127
5.00 127
4.00 102
4.00 102
4.00 102
12.00 305
12.00 305
12.00 305
2.00 51
2.00 51
2.00 51
Top Conduit Entrance–Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections (30-inch wide)
Bottom Conduit Entrance–Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections (30-inch wide)
NOTE: Top conduit entrance area is reduced when close-coupled with a transformer.
512.00
2038.00
66026.00
35614.00
2038.00
25.00 635
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
893.50
893.50
893.50
1.33 34
1.33 34
30.00 762
25.00 635
25.00 635
30.00 762
1.33 34
30.00 762
Power-Zone® 4Dimensions
8111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 53: Top and Bottom Conduit Entrance Dimensions (36-inch wide Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections)–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
60.00
182972.00
137254.00
31.00
78731.00
1275.00
38115.00
68627.00
787
31.00 787
9.00 229
1524
342.0
1024.00
1275.00
1024.00
1275.00
30512.00
342.0
342.0
1024.00
30512.00
512.00
36.00 914
2038.00
30512.00
66026.00
35614.00
2038.00
642.50
642.50
36.00 914
36.00 914
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
512.00
2038.00
1024.00
642.50
893.50
893.50
893.50
1.33 1.331.33
Top Conduit Entrance–Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections (36-inch wide)
Bottom Conduit Entrance–Main, Tie, and Feeder Sections (36-inch wide)
NOTE: Top conduit entrance area is reduced when close-coupled with a transformer.
82© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Dimensions
Figure 54: NEMA 3R Walk-in Low Voltage Switchboard/Switchgear Top Conduit Entrance Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
Figure 55: NEMA 3R Walk-in Low Voltage Switchboard/Switchgear Bottom Conduit Entrance Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
Exhaust Fan
Busway
5.42(138)
5.42(138)
4.00(102)
3.86(102)
47.0
0(11
94)
15. 5
17 5
.23
( 191
8 .65
)
25.77(656)
13.96(355)
4.00(102)
4.00(102)
13.00
11.25
31.00
26.00
47.0(1194)
2.8(71)
2.8(71)
15.25(387)
23.25(591)
29.25(743)
Power-Zone® 4Dimensions
8311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 56: Front Elevation Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
Typical Auxiliary Section–A (22-inch wide)
Typical Auxiliary Section–B (36-inch wide)
91.502324
22.00559
AB
CD
91.502,324
36.00914
AB
CD
Typical Main and Tie Circuit Breakers–A (22-inch wide)
Typical Main and Tie Circuit Breakers–B (22-inch wide)
91.502324
22.00559
B
D
A
C
91.502324
22.00559
A
D
BC
Table 11: Typical Auxiliary–A (22-inch wide)
Location Description
AB Blank or instrument
CD Blank or instrument
Table 12: Typical Auxiliary–B (36-inch wide)
Location Description
AB Blank or instrument
CD Blank or instrument
Table 11: Typical Main and Tie–A (22-inch wide)
Location DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Blank or instrument – –
B Main or tie 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
C Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
D Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
Table 12: Typical Main and Tie–B (22-inch wide)
Location DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Blank or instrument – –
BC Main or tie 3200 A H1–H2
D Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
NOTE: Any main, tie, or feeder compartment positions may be used as a blank, or instrument compartment. Not convertible for future circuit breaker use. Height including secondary wiring trough compartment is 93.7 inches (2380 mm).
84© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Dimensions
Figure 57: Front Elevation Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
Typical Main and Tie Circuit Breakers–C (36-inch wide)
Typical Feeder Circuit Breakers–A (22-inch wide)
Typical Feeder Circuit Breakers–B (22-inch wide)
Typical Feeder Circuit Breakers–C (22-inch wide)
91.502324
36.00914
A
D
BC 91.502324
22.00559
B
D
A
C
91.502324
22.00559
AB
CD CD
91.502324
22.00559
B
A
Table 15: Typical Feeder–B (22-inch wide)
Location
DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
AB blank or instrument
CD Feeder 3200 A H1–H2
Table 16: Typical Feeder–C (22-inch wide)
Location
DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
B Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
CD Feeder 3200 A H1–H2
Table 13: Typical Main and Tie–C (36-inch wide)
Location
DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Blank or instrument – –
BC Main or tie 4000 A–5000 A H2
D Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2
Table 14: Typical Feeder–A (22-inch wide)
Location
DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
B Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
C Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
D Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F, NT
NOTE: Any main, tie, or feeder compartment positions may be used as a blank, or instrument compartment. Not convertible for future circuit breaker use. Height including secondary wiring trough compartment is 93.7 inches (2380 mm).
Power-Zone® 4Dimensions
8511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 58: Front Elevation Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
91.502324
36.00914
A
CD
B
Typical Feeder Circuit Breakers–D (36-inch wide)
91.502324
36.00914
AB
CD
Typical Feeder Circuit Breakers–E (36-inch wide)
91.502324
22.00559
B
D
A
C
Typical L1 Main and Tie Circuit Breakers–A (36-inch wide)
91.502324
36.00914
A
D
BC
Typical L1 Feeder Circuit Breakers–A (22-inch wide)
Table 17: Typical Feeder–D (36-inch wide)
Location DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F
B Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F
CD Feeder 4000 A–5000 A H2
Table 18: Typical Feeder–E (36-inch wide)
Location
DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
AB Feeder 4000 A–5000 A H2
CD Feeder 4000 A–5000 A H2
Table 19: Typical L1 Main and Tie–A (200 kA @ 480 V) (36-inch wide)
Location DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Blank or instrument – –
BC Main or tie 2000 A–5000 A L1
D Feeder 2000 A L1, L1F
Table 20: Typical L1 Feeder–A (200 kA @ 480 V) (22-inch wide)
Location DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Feeder 800 A–2000 A L1, L1F
B Feeder 800 A–2000 A L1, L1F
C Feeder 800 A–2000 A L1, L1F
D Feeder 800 A–2000 A L1, L1F
NOTE: Any main, tie, or feeder compartment positions may be used as a blank, or instrument compartment. Not convertible for future circuit breaker use.Height including secondary wiring trough compartment is 93.7 inches (2380 mm).
86© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Dimensions
Figure 59: Front Elevation Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
NOTE: Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
Figure 60: Front View, NEMA 3R Walk-in Low Voltage Switchboard/Switchgear
91.502324
30.00764
A
D
B
C
1 2
Typical Feeder Circuit Breakers (30-inch wide)
Table 19: Typical Feeder–F (30-inch wide)
Location
DescriptionFrameSize
FrameSCCR
A Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F
A1/A2 Feeder 800 A NT N1
B Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F
B1/B2 Feeder 800 A NT N1
C Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F
C1/C2 Feeder 800 A NT N1
D Feeder 800 A–2000 A N1–H2, L1F
D1/D2 Feeder 800 A NT N1
4.0(102)
84.0(2134)
118.0(2298)
6.26(159)
5.42(138)
2.8(71)
5.42(138)
2.8(71)
Power-Zone® 4Dimensions
8711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 61: Right Side View, NEMA 3R Walk-in Low Voltage Switchboard/Switchgear
4.0(102)3.86
(96)
81.89(2080)
13.96(355)
36.0(915)
93.8(2383)
37.42(951)
38.0(966)
20.0(508)
47.0(1194)
74.25(1886)
84.0(2134)
88.0(2235)
118.0(2298)
88© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Dimensions
SYSTEM DESIGN
Figure 62: Front Elevation Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
Typical 5 Bay Representation (22-inch wide) with 3200 A Main-Tie-Main, Double-ended Lineup
91.502324
55922.00
55922.00
55922.00
55922.00
55922.00
2794110.00
111844.00
167666.00
Main 1
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
FeederFeeder
Main 2
Feeder
Tie
Feeder
Power-Zone® 4Dimensions
8911/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Figure 63: Front Elevation Dimensions–Not for Construction (consult factory drawings)
Typical 3 Bay Representation (36-inch and 22-inch wide)
91.502324
91436.00
55922.00
55922.00
2032
80.00
111844.00
91436.00
Main
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder Feeder
90© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Dimensions
WEIGHTS
Refer to the shipping documents for the correct weights and dimensions. The weights given here are approximate values. Consult shipping documents for actual weights.
Table 20: Switchgear 4 High without Circuit Breakers
Bus Rating22 Wide 36 Wide
lbs Kg lbs Kg
1600 A–2000 A 1200 545 1300 591
3200 A 1400 636 1500 682
40000 A–5000 A 1700 773 1800 818
Table 21: Masterpact NW Circuit Breaker Weights
Amperes Lbs. Kg.
800 110 50
1600 110 50
2000 110 50
3200 110 50
2000 ➀ 230 105
3200 ➀ 230 105
4000 ➀ 230 105
5000 ➀ 230 105
➀6 Pole (double-wide)
Table 22: Masterpact NT Circuit Breaker Weights
Amperes Lbs Kg
800 40 18
Power-Zone® 4Suggested Specifications
9111/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
SECTION 6 : SUGGESTED SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION CONTENTS
“General” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92“Standards” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92“Ratings” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
“Products” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93“Manufacturers” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93“Structure” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93“Circuit Breaker Compartment” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93“Bus Compartment” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94“Cable Compartment” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95“Circuit Breakers and Trip Units” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95“Metering and Instrumentation” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
92© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Suggested Specifications
GENERAL
This specification and associated drawings describe Power-Zone 4 switchgear constructed to ANSI C37.20.1 industry standards. The main components of the switchgear are Masterpact® NW and NT circuit breakers.
NOTE: Square D Type Masterpact circuit breakers are described in “Square D Specifications, Section 16410-5–Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers”.
Standards
Power-Zone 4 switchgear equipment shall be designed, tested, and manufactured according to the following standards.
Main and feeder Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers used in Power-Zone 4 switchgear shall be designed, tested, and manufactured to the following standards.
Ratings
Power-Zone 4 switchgear available ampacity ratings are outlined below.
The short-circuit current rating of the system shall be determined by the available fault current at the Power-Zone 4 switchgear. All circuit interruption shall be accomplished by the Masterpact circuit breakers without the aid of limiter fuses. The short-time rating shall also be a function on the desired selectivity of the electrical system. Short-time ratings shall be equal to interrupting ratings for systems delivering up to 85 kA available fault current.
Standard Description
ANSI C37.20.1 Metal-enclosed low voltage circuit breaker switchgear
ANSI C.37.51 Testing of metal-enclosed low voltage ac circuit breaker switchgear
NEMA SG-5 Power switchgear assemblies
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 31-M89 Switchgear assemblies
UBC and CBC Zone 4 seismic applications
UL 1558 Switchgear assemblies
Standard Description
ANSI C37.13 Low voltage ac power circuit breakers used in equipment
ANSI C37.16 Preferred rating, related requirement and application recommendations for low voltage power circuit breakers and ac power circuit breakers
ANSI C37.17 Trip devices for ac and general-purpose dc low voltage power circuit breakers
ANSI C37.50 Testing of low voltage ac circuit breakers
NEMA SG-3 Low voltage circuit breakers
UL 1066 Low voltage circuit breakers
System Ampacity
1600
2000
3200
4000
5000
Power-Zone® 4Suggested Specifications
9311/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Available short-circuit current ratings are outlined below.
Powerzone 4 switchgear is designed for use on 50 Hz or 60 Hz electrical systems up to 600 Vac and shall be properly braced to the ratings of the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers installed within the switchgear.
PRODUCTS
Manufacturers
Power-Zone 4 switchgear shall be manufactured by Schneider Electric company. The Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Schneider Electric company.
Structure
Structure specifications for the Power-Zone 4 switchgear are outlined below.
General
A. Each steel section of the switchgear shall contain one or more individual circuit breaker compartments or auxiliary instrument compartments, as well as a bus compartment and rear compartment for outgoing cable connections.
B. A rigid removable steel base channel shall be provided at the front and rear of each section.
C. The exterior and interior switchgear finish shall be medium ANSI #49 gray.
Dimensions
A. Section widths shall be 22-inches, 30-inches, or 36-inches wide, depending on the size of the Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers being installed in the switchgear.
B. The switchgear lineup shall provide adequate wire bending space for main and feeder Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers using up to 750 kcmil wires.
C. Section depth shall be 54-inches minimum when using 800 A feeders. Additional depth to the lineup shall be for the sole purpose of additional wire bending and conduit space.
D. Adequate conduit space that allows all conductors to exit the section at the same location.
Moving and Handling
A. The switchgear lineup shall be divided into shipping splits not to exceed 88-inches wide and shall be capable of being lifted overhead or by using a forklift.
B. Each shipping split shall have removable lifting straps.
C. Removable base channels shall be provided with prying slots for ease of final positioning at the job site.
D. For Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers, an overhead lifter or floor crane shall be provided to ease the installation or removal of circuit breakers in excess of 75 pounds.
Circuit Breaker Compartment
Power-Zone 4 switchgear circuit breaker compartments shall contain Masterpact NW and NT circuit breakers with Micrologic trip units.
Short-Circuit Current RatingShort-Time Close and Latch
240 V 480 V 600 V
42 kA 42 kA 42 kA 42 kA 42 kA
65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA
85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 85 kA 50 kA
200 kA 200 kA 130 kA 30 kA (minimum) 22 kA (minimum)
94© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Suggested Specifications
Masterpact NW and NT Circuit Breakers
A. Each circuit breaker shall be mounted in its own barriered compartment.
B. Feeder circuit breakers rated 2000 A or less shall be capable of being mounted in the uppermost compartment without de-rating.
C. The front of the circuit breaker shall protrude through the door of the switchgear allowing access to circuit breaker controls, indicators, and the trip unit.
D. The design shall allow for closed door racking in circuit breaker compartments.
E. Circuit breakers of like frames shall be interchangeable, as standard.
F. Prepared circuit breaker compartments shall include the racking mechanism, bussing, and secondary contacts, as necessary.
G. Circuit breaker and prepared circuit breaker compartments shall be “keyed” to avoid insertion of circuit breakers with similar dimensions but insufficient interrupting ratings, or incorrect frame sizes into an inappropriate circuit breaker compartment.
H. Up to eight (8) physically smaller frame circuit breakers (rated 800 A or less) may be mounted in a 30-inch wide section when fault current interrupting ratings permit. When these smaller sized circuit breakers are used, all requirements listed above shall still be met.
Secondary Connections
A. All customer secondary control and communications connections shall be made from the front of the switchgear lineup.
B. A dedicated wiring channel accessible from the front of the switchgear shall allow easy access to all control or communications terminations.
C. Control connections shall be either cage clamp or optional ring tongue terminals. All control wire shall be #14 gauge SIS.
D. Dedicated conduit entry for control wires shall be provided at the top and bottom of each section, capable of landing up to four 3/4-inch conduits and accessible from the front of the switchgear.
E. All interconnections between switchgear sections at shipping splits shall use locking, pull-apart type terminal blocks.
F. All secondary and communication wiring shall be securely fastened to the switchgear with minimal use of adhesive backed wire anchors. Adhesive backed anchors shall be allowed on doors to aid in wire routing.
Instrumentation
A. Where additional space is required for instrumentation, such as CPTs and metering, a barriered auxiliary instrumentation compartment shall be used in the switchgear.
B. The auxiliary instrumentation compartment shall not inhibit the routing of control or communication wires.
Bus Compartment
A. All vertical and cross bus shall be rated for the full ampacity of the switchgear lineup.
B. All bus joints shall consist of grade 5 hardware and conical washers to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short circuits. All bus joints shall consist of a minimum of 2 bolts.
C. Bus shall be plated along its entire length.
D. Bus shall be braced to withstand the instantaneous interrupting rating of the main breaker(s) or 65 kA minimum.
E. Optional barriers shall be available to separate the bus and cable compartments.
Power-Zone® 4Suggested Specifications
9511/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Cable Compartment
A. All incoming or outgoing power conductors shall be routed through the rear cable compartment.
B. Feeder circuit breakers shall have adequate wire bending space, regardless of the circuit breaker interrupting rating.
The table below lists the section depth needed to meet wire bending requirements.
C. The conduit area for each section shall be a minimum of 17-inches wide and provide adequate depth for all section conduits.
D. Select depth based on the table requirements listed below. The dimensions in the table indicate approximate conduit area for cable fed mains and feeders. All dimensions are in inches.
E. Barriers to separate the cable compartment from the adjacent cable compartment shall be available for the switchgear assembly.
Circuit Breakers and Trip Units
Masterpact NW and NT Circuit Breakers
A. Circuit breakers shall be Masterpact® NW and NT circuit breakers. Listed to UL 1066.
B. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for the required instantaneous rating without the use of external current limiting fuses.
C. All circuit breakers shall have field interchangeable electrical accessories, including shunt trip, auxiliary contacts, electrical operating mechanism, shunt close, and trip unit.
D. All secondary connections shall be made directly to the front of the circuit breaker cradle.
E. Each circuit breaker shall have built-in contact temperature sensors and contact wear indicators.
Micrologic (Basic, Type A, Type P, and Type H) Trip Units
A. All trip units shall be removable to allow for field upgrades.
B. Trip units shall incorporate “true RMS sensing,” and have LED long-time pickup indications.
C. The table on page 95 lists the standard and optional trip unit features for Micrologic Type A (ammeter), Type P (Power Metering), and Type H (Harmonics) trip units for use in Power-Zone 4 switchgear.
Select the appropriate trip unit(s) for the system performance desired.
Feeder Circuit Breaker
Section Depth (inches)
800 A (max.) 54
4000 A (max.) 60
4000 A (max.) 72 (optional)
4000 A (max.) 80 (optional)
Section Width (inches)
Section Depth
54-inches 60-inches 72-inches 80-inches
22 17 W x 8 D 17 W x 14 D 17 W x 26 D 17 W x 34 D
30 25 W x 8 D 25 W x 14 D 25 W x 26 D 25 W x 34 D
36 31 W x 8 D 31 W x 14 D 31 W x 26 D 31 W x 34 D
Functions Basic Type A Type P Type H
True RMS sensing X X X X
LI trip configuration X X X X
LSI O O X X
96© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4 Suggested Specifications
Table Values:
– Not Applicable
X Standard Feature
O Optional Feature
Metering and Instrumentation
Metering and communication requirements for Power-Zone 4 switchgear are listed below.
Main Metering
A. Metering requirements that exceed the capabilities of the circuit breaker trip units shall use the optional Powerlogic® Power Monitoring System.
B. Three metering current transformers shall be appropriately sized for use on the incoming section.
C. Separate low voltage HMI and circuit monitor display shall be mounted near the incoming section.
D. Optional input/output (I/O) and the Ethernet communications card shall be provided as necessary.
Communications
A. Internal communications in the switchgear shall be Modbus® protocol.
B. Where necessary, an Ethernet gateway shall be located near the switchgear assembly and be capable of accepting inputs from the Micrologic® trip unit(s), Powerlogic circuit monitor(s), and Modicon PLCs.
LSIG/ground fault trip – O X X
Ground fault alarm (no trip) – – X X
Ground fault trip and programming alarm – – O O
Adjustable rating plugs X X X X
LED – long–time pickup X X X X
LED – trip indication – X X X
Digital ammeter – X X X
Phase loading bar graph – X X X
Zone selective interlocking – X X X
Communications – O X X
LCD dot matrix display – – X X
Advanced user interface – – X X
Protective relay functions – – X X
Thermal imaging – – X X
Contact wear indication – – X X
Temperature indication – – X X
Incremental fine tuning of settings – – X X
Selective long-time delay bands – – X X
Power measurement – – X X
Waveform capture – – – X
Data logging – – – X
Functions Basic Type A Type P Type H
Power-Zone® 4
9711/2005 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
A
accessory terminals 17application
circuit breaker 7–8seismic 8voltage systems 9
applicationshigh altitude 68seismic 68
arc chutes 27Arc Flash 34automatic transfer
systems 67auxiliary
connection wiring 18sections 21switches 28
auxiliary instrument compartment
circuit monitor display 21
control components 21
control power transformers 21
meters 21potential
transformers 21
relays 21
Bbus compartment
current transformers 20
ground bus 20horizontal cross bus
20main bus 20neutral bus 20neutral ground
sensor 20vertical bus risers 20
Ccable compartment
barriers 19cable installation 19cable lugs 19cable terminations 19copper load bars 19load bars 19mechanical lugs 19mounting holes 19terminal connections
19capability
circuit breaker 24cell keying 28charge/discharge
indicator 27
circuit breakeraccessories 28arc chute chamber
27arc chutes 27automatic transfer
systems 67capability 24features and benefits
6, 22inspection 27key interlocking 28,
41operation 26parts 25ratings 8, 38–40standards 8transformer ratings
54two-step stored
energy mechanism 27
types 24circuit breaker
compartmentcontrol and
communications wiring 18
cradle 23four-position racking
26horizontal wireway
23vertical wireway 23
circuit monitor display 21, 33
conduit entrancecontrol conduits 17dimensions 76–82top plate 17
contact wear indicator 27control and
communications wiring
conduit entrances 17electrical accessories
18features and benefits
17horizontal wireway
17terminal blocks 18top plate 17vertical wireway 17
control components 21control power
transformers 21control wiring 18copper load bars 19cradle 23current transformers 20
curves, trip unit 43–51
DDelta systems
grounded 61high resistance
grounding 66ungrounded 61
diagramsalarm and cradle
contacts 70power, trip unit, and
remote operation 72
dimensionsbottom conduit,
auxiliary 76–78
bottom conduit, main-tie-feeder 79–82
front elevation, 3 bay representation 89
front elevation, 5 bay representation 88
front elevation, auxiliary 83, 86
front elevation, feeder 84–86
front elevation, main and tie 83–84, 86
top conduit, auxiliary 76–78
top conduit, main-tie-feeder 79–82
Eenclosures
NEMA type 1 15NEMA type 3R 16
Ffour-position racking 26front compartment 13front elevation
dimensions 83, 86–89
functionMicrologic 8Powerlogic 8through-the-door 7
Gground bus 20ground fault
modified differential 64
protection 61–62sensing 63
Hhorizontal cross bus 20horizontal wireway 17
Kkey interlocking 28, 41key locks 21, 28
Llifter bar 22load bars 19lugs
cable 19mechanical 19
Mmain bus 20Masterpact® NW circuit
breakers, see circuit breaker
mechanical lugs 19metering 8Micrologic® trip units, see
trip units
NNEMA enclosures
type 1 15type 3R 16
neutral bus 20neutral ground sensor 20
Oopen/close indicator 27opening and closing coils
28operations counter 27
Ppadlocks 21, 28Powerlogic 8POWERLOGIC® system
data communications 32
features and benefits 31
system communications 32
system management 31
see also trip unitsPowerlogic® system
circuit monitor display 21, 33
circuit monitors 33Power-Zone® 4
switchgear, see switchgear
Rratings
circuit breaker 8, 38–40
switchgear 8, 38transformer 54trip units 41
rear cable compartment, see cable compartment
Ssecondary
disconnecting contacts 18, 27
disconnecting terminals 18
terminal block 18sensor plug 28shunt trip unit 28shutters 28specifications, suggested
92–95spring charging motor
27–28standards
circuit breaker 8switchgear 8
switchgearaccessories 28auxiliary instrument
compartment 21
auxiliary sections 21bus compartment 20cable compartment
19control and
communications wiring 17
features and benefits 6
four-position racking 26
front compartment 13moving and handling
options 21ratings 8, 38specifications,
suggested 92–95
standards 8structure 13
98© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/2005
Power-Zone® 4
through-the-door construction 23
typical assembly 13system design
3 bay representation 89
5 bay representation 88
Tterminal connections 19through-the-door
construction 23transformer ratings 54traveling lifter assembly
22trip units
basic 29curves 43–51features and benefits
6, 29functionality matrix
42Powerlogic® data
communications 6, 28
ratings 41type A (ammeter) 29type H (harmonics)
30type P (power
metering) 30
UUL 1008 67
Vvertical
bus risers 20wireway 17
Wwiring
horizontal wireway 17
vertical wireway 17wiring diagrams
alarm and cradle contacts 70
power, trip unit, and remote operation 72
Wye systems3-wire distribution 604-wire distribution 60ground fault
protection 61–62
high resistance grounding 65
low level grounds 61solidly grounded 60
6037CT9901R4/05 © 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Replaces 6037CT9901R9/02
Schneider Electric USA8821 Garners Ferry RoadColumbia, SC 29209 USA1-888-SquareD (1-888-778-2733)www.us.SquareD.com
Schneider Electric Canada19 Waterman Avenue,M4B 1 Y2Toronto, Ontario1-800-565-6699www.schneider-electric.ca
11/2005
Features Measurements Bidirectional, absolute, and net energy measurements. Rolling block, predicted, and thermal demand. Individual and total harmonic distortion up to the 31st. Advanced logic and mathematical functions.
Internet-enabled communicationsTwo RS-485 ports, infrared data port standard. Optional built-in modem with ModemGate allows modem access for 31 other devices. Optional Ethernet port with EtherGate allows direct Ethernet-to-RS-485 data transfer to 31 other devices. Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, DNP 3.0, and PROFIBUS DP. Call-back feature offers fast alarm response. WebMeter and MeterM@il® allow distribution of metered data and alarms over the Internet.
InteroperabilityCommunicate via multiple protocols to add to existing Modbus, DNP or ION Enterprise networks. Logs and real-time values are available via Modbus. These meters are supported by UTS MV-90® via serial and Ethernet.
On-board data loggingScheduled or event-driven logging of up to 96 parameters. Sequence-of-events and min/max logging.
Setpoints for control and alarmsUse logical operators and setpoints to configure alarms, define basic control algorithms, and implement back-up protection. Setpoints can trigger data logging, digital outputs, pulse outputs, clearing and reset functions, call-back (ION7350).
Logic and mathSophisticated logic and mathematical functions to perform on-board calculations on any measured value (ION7330, ION7350).
Inputs and outputsFour digital inputs for status/counter functions. Four digital outputs for control/pulse functions. Optional analogue inputs and outputs.
Front panel displayEasy to read backlit LCD with adjustable contrast, supporting eight customisable data displays (scrolled automatically or manually) and basic setup.
PowerLogic ION7300 with remote modular display
Integ
rated
netw
ork c
ompr
ising
corp
orate
intra
net,
Inter
net,
seria
l, di
alup
or w
ireles
s con
necti
ons
Typical uses within a PowerLogic power and energy management system
Financial management including accounting and billing
Facility and energy management
Operations management including engineering, planning and maintenance
Power generation, transmission and distribution
Service entrances and onsite generation
Power mitigation and main power distribution equipment
PDUs and data servers
Tenants, departments or subcontractors
Processes, lines, machines or equipment
PowerLogic ION7300 series Schneider Electric PowerLogic ION7300 series meters offer unmatched value, functionality, and ease of use. Used in enterprise energy management applications such as feeder monitoring and sub-metering, PowerLogic ION7300 series meters interface with ION Enterprise software or other power management or automation systems to provide users with real-time information for monitoring and analysis.
The meter is available in three models, with incremental features sets and a variety of options. PowerLogic ION7300 meters are an ideal replacement for analogue meters, while also providing a multitude of power and energy measurements, analog and digital I/O, communication ports and industry-standard protocols. The ION7330 meter adds on-board data storage, emails of logged data, and an optional modem. The ION7350 meter is further augmented by more sophisticated power quality analysis, alarms and a call-back-on-alarm feature. Refer to the detailed descriptions within for a complete list of feature availability.
ApplicationsFor infrastructure, industrials and buildings
Energy efficiency and cost
Sub-bill tenants for energy costs
Allocate energy costs to departments or processes
Reduce peak demand surcharges
Reduce power factor penalties
Power availability and reliability
Verify the reliable operation of equipment
Improve response to power quality-related problems
Leverage existing infrastructure capacity and avoid over-building
Support proactive maintenance to prolong asset life
For electric utilitiesPower availability and reliability
Improve T&D network reliability
Enhance substation automation
Maximise the use of existing infrastructure
Analyse and isolate the source of power quality problems
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
InstallationStandard PowerLogic ION7300 series meters with integrated display are designed to fit into DIN standard 92 X 92 mm (3.62 x 3.62 in.) cutout. Simply slide the mounting bars into the grooves on either side of the unit. The TRAN option provides a base unit without display that can be mounted either flush against any flat surface in whichever orientation is most convenient; attached to any standard DIN rail (requires optional DIN rail mount); or installed in a cutout (as the standard model). The remote modular display (RMD) can be mounted as the standard unit. A 1.8 m (6 ft.) cable is supplied.
4-wire Wye, Delta, 3-wire Wye, Direct Delta and single phase systems. 3 voltage and 3 current inputs. No PTs required on voltage inputs for Wye systems up to 347/600 V ac and Delta systems up to 600 V ac. All inputs pass ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989 surge withstand and fast transient tests.
1 Accuracy may be affected if the voltage on V1 falls below 50. 2 If the peak anticipated load is considerably less than the rated system capacity, you can improve accuracy and resolution by selecting a lower rated CT.
92 mm3.6 “
96 mm3.78 “
96 mm3.78 “
Front panelEasy to read backlit LCD with adjustable contrast. LCD supports local data display and basic setup. Remote display option to 1.8 m (6 ft) from base unit. Eight data display screens (kWh net, kWh swd / mx, Volts, Amps, Power, Frequency, V-THD, I-THD) can be customised through the communications port to show chosen parameters, and scrolled manually or automatically. The front panel can display up to nine digits of resolution for numeric values. Four display formats are available: 4 parameter, to single-parameter large character displays. Customer-designed parameter labels are programmable via PowerLogic ION Enterprise software.
PowerLogic ION7350
Input(s) Specifications
Voltage inputs
Inputs U1, U2, U3, Uref
Rated inputs150 to 347 L-N (87 to 600 L-L) V ac rms (3-phase systems)
50 to 300 L-N (100 to 600 L-L) V ac rms (single-phase systems)
Overload 1500 V ac rms continuous
Input impedance > 2 M Ω per phase (phase-vref)
Current inputs
Inputs I1, I2, I3
Rated inputs 10 A rms (+ 20% maximum, 300 V rms to ground)
Overload 20 A continuous
Dielectric withstand 500 A for one second (non-recurring)
Burden 0.0625 VA @ 10 Amps
Control power
Operating rangeStandard model: 95 to 240 V ac ±10% (47 - 440 Hz); DC: 120 to 310 V dc ±10%
P24 option: 20 to 60 V dc ±10%
Current transformers
Compatibility 5 A nominal, 10 A full-scale secondaries.
Primary CT rating Equal to current rating of the power feed protection device.2
Secondary CT burden capacity
> 3 VA
Example meter display formats.
Power and energy measurementsFully bi-directional, 4-quadrant, revenue-accurate or revenue-certified energy metering. They can replace discrete energy meters, demand meters and pulse initiators, and perform a wide range of other metering and instrumentation functions.
Supports thermal demand and sliding window (rolling block) demand. Factory-configured to calculate average current demand and kW, kvar and kVA demand. User-configureable time intervals for demand calculations and sensitivity settings.
Display resolution meets or exceeds accuracy.1 50 V ac to 347 V ac + 25 % 2 % full scale voltage and current. Accuracy specifications comply with IEC 60687 Class 0.5 and ANSI 12.20 Class 0.5 at 25°C (77°F)3 Register bounds 0 to ± 3.3x107 (kW) and 0 to ± 1038 (kWh)
Power qualityUse meter data to help uncover the sources of harmonics and voltage sags/swells. Analyse problems and avoid repeat interruptions.
Harmonics (all models): individual harmonics, even, odd, total up to 15th (31st on ION7350). Total harmonic distortion: 1% Full Scale. I4 derivation. 1% reading + 0.2% unbalanced. K Factor: 5.0 % Full Scale.
Sag/swells (ION7350 only): monitors applicable phase voltages for temporary undervoltages and overvoltages (i.e. CBEMA Type 2 and Type 3 disturbances). Voltage waveforms for sags and swells; report on each disturbance magnitude and duration.
Sampling rate (all models): Up to 32 samples per cycle (64 on ION7350).
Waveform (digital fault) recording (ION7350 only): Simultaneous event capture on all channels, up to 48 cycles each. Resolution: 64 samples per cycle; maximum number of cycles for contiguous waveform capture: 6,900 (16 samples/cycle x 48 cycles). depth of 3, the interval is triggered on demand.
.
v
v
v
v
Example from PowerLogic ION Enterprise software showing continuous, wide-area monitoring, data capture and reporting for power quality and reliability conditions.
Measurement specifications1 (at 50.0 Hz and 60.0 Hz at 25° C / 77° F)
Accuracy ± (%rdg + %fs2)
Voltage 0.25% + 0.05%
Current 0.25% + 0.05%
Power, real (kW) 0.5% reading
Energy, real (kWh) 0.5% reading3
Power, apparent (kVA) 0.5% + 0.1%
Energy, apparent (kVAh) 1.0% reading
Power, reactive (kvar) > 5 % FS 1.5% reading
Energy, reactive (kvarh) 1.5% reading
Power factor (at unity PF) 1.5% reading
Frequency U1,U2,U3 (42-69 Hz): per phase, total ±0.01 Hz
Data and event logging (ION7330, ION7350)Ships with a comprehensive data-logging configuration. Data is prioritised and stored onboard in nonvolatile memory to eliminate data gaps in the event of outages or server downtime. Retrieved data is stored in an ODBC-compliant database when using ION Enterprise. Logs various power system data such as energy and demand, or the average power system quantity used over a period of time (Historic Mean Log). Standard memory capacity for both meters is 304 kilobytes. Default logging depth is set for 930 records.
Historic log: record any combination of measurements at scheduled intervals by setpoints or logic conditions. Configure for up to 30 days of recording capacity at 15 minute intervals. Default depth of 930, interval of 900 seconds (15 minutes).
Min/Max log: on any parameter, over any time interval (e.g. daily, monthly). Easily record other values coinciding with the new minimum or maximum. Defaults: min and max for all basic power parameters.
Report Generator log (EgyDmd Log): Default depth and interval.
Sag/Swell log (ION7350 only): Detect sags, swells on any voltage channel and record instantaneous values and waveforms. Depth of 100; interval triggered on demand.
Event log: Depth of 50; nterval triggered on demand.
Time of use (TOU)2-year internal calendar with up to 15 daily tariff profiles. Programmable triggers.Separate energy and demand accumulators.
Event priorities and alarmingConfigurable event priorities allow you to define alarm conditions. Sequence-of-events time-stamped to ±10ms accuracy. Time-stamped record of all configuration changes, setpoint and min/max events.
v
v
v
v
v
Example log configurations
Waveform recording settings
A 16 parameters recorded every 15 minutes B 16 parameters recorded hourly C 4 parameters recorded every 15 minutesD 4 parameters recorded every hour
Inputs and outputsAll meter models: four digital outputs, one infrared data port, one configurable LED output. Four digital status inputs standard on ION7330 and ION7350 meters. Optional analogue I/O ports can be used to monitor flow rates, RPM, fluid levels, oil pressures and transformer temperatures. Output real-time power to an RTU or perform equipment control operations.
1 Analogue I/O is not available with RMD or Ethernet options.
Met
er
Even
t
Dat
a
Chan
nel
Sam
ples
/ ch
anne
l
Cycl
es
Reco
rd
Day
s
7330 500 A - - - - 29
500 B - - - - 118
500 C - - - - 96
500 D - - - - 383
7350 500 A 6 32 12 3 28
500 B 6 32 12 3 111
500 C 6 16 48 3 26
500 D 6 64 16 3 331
Type Input / output Specifications
Solid state relays 4 Form A digital outputs:
D1-D41
Maximum voltage: 30 V dc; maximum current: 80 mA; isolation: optical; continuous or pulse signals
Digital
Self-excited (internal 30 V dc supply)
4 inputs (option):
S1 - S4Self-excited (internal 30 VDC supply). Min pulse width: 25 ms. Max. transition rate: 40 transitions per second (20 Hz).
Analogue (option)1
4 inputs:
AI 1 to AI 4
Accuracy ±0.3% of full-scale; update rate 1 Hz; max. common mode voltage 30 V.
0-20 mA (scalable to 4-20 mA) option: input impedance 25 Ω, maximum source impedance 500 Ω.
0-1 mA option: input impedance 475 Ω, maximum source impedance 10 kΩ.
4 outputs:
A1 to A4
Accuracy ±0.3% of full-scale; channel to channel isolation: none. Max. common mode voltage: 30 V.
0-20 mA (scalable to 4-20 mA) option: max. load drive capability 500 Ω.
0-1 mA option: max. load drive capability 10 kΩ.
General specifications
EtherGate and ModemGate
The meters can provide gateway functionality depending on communication options.
EtherGate: provides access from an Ethernet network using Modbus TCP protocol to devices connected to the meter’s serial ports.
ModemGate: provides access from the telephone network to devices connected to the meter’s serial ports.
Internet connectivityXML: to integrate with custom reporting, spreadsheet, database, and other applications.
WebMeter: an on-board web server, provides access to real-time values and PQ data through any web-enabled device and even supports basic meter configuration tasks.
MeterM@il: automatically emails user-configured, high-priority alarm notifications or scheduled system-status update messages to anyone, anywhere within the facility or around the world.
EtherGate ModemGate
Ethernet SerialSerialTelephone
line
Software integrationPowerLogic ION7330 and ION7350 can communicate via multiple protocols to extend existing Modbus, DNP or ION Enterprise networks. Logs and real-time values are available via Modbus. Meters supported by UTS MV-90® via serial and Ethernet. Integrate within PowerLogic facility-level or enterprise-wide power and energy management systems. Real-time data and data logs stored onboard can be automatically retrieved on a scheduled basis for analysis at the system level. Compatible with PowerLogic ION Enterprise and PowerLogic ION Setup.
Special featuresFlash-based firmware allows upgrades via communications without removing the meter from the site. Simply download the latest firmware from www.powerlogic.com.
CommunicationsMultiple communication ports that operate simultaneously allow the meters to be used as part of a power and energy management system and to interface with other automation systems. Upload waveforms, alarms, billing data, and more to software for viewing and analysis.
1 The meter COM2 port functions as a dedicated EtherGate port (RS-485 Master) on ION7330 and ION7350 meters with the Ethernet option2 The meter COM1 port functions as a dedicated ModemGate port (RS-485 Master) on ION7330 and ION7350 meters with the internal modem option
Port Specifications
RS-485 portsION7300 has a single RS-485 port. ION7330 and ION7350 meters can have two RS-485 ports. Supports DNP 3.0
Infrared data portFront panel optical port. Compatible with an ANSI Type 2 magnetic optical communications coupler. Data rates up to 19,200 bps.
Ethernet port (optional)Optional 10Base-T port for direct access to metering information via Ethernet LAN/WAN. EtherGate (data transfer between Ethernet and RS-485).1
PROFIBUS port (optional ION7300 only)
PROFIBUS DP standard protocol support via sub-D 9 pin female connector.
Internal modem (ION7330, ION7350)
Data rates from 300 bps to 33,600 bps. RJ-11 connector, ModemGate (data transfer between modem and RS-485).2 Compatible with power monitoring software that supports Modbus RTU, ION or DNP 3.0. The ION7350 meter is offered with a call-back feature for quick alarm response.
Description Specifications
Accuracy IEC 60687 class 0.5S; ANSI C12.16; ANSI class 10, (5 A nominal, 10 A max); OFGEM approved (UK)
Safety/construction IEC 1010-1; CE marked; UL: Certified to UL 3111; CAN/CSA C22.2 No.1010-1
Electromagnetic compatibility EN 55014-1:1993; EN 61000-4-4; EN 60687:1993 for immunity to electromagnetic HF fields; EN 60687:1993 for immunity to electrostatic discharges. Analog I/O: each analog I/O pin passes IEC 61000-4-4 (4 kVp-p @ 2.5 kHz for 1 min).
Surge withstand All inputs pass ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1989 surge withstand and fast transient tests
Environmental conditions Operation: -20° C to +60° C (-4° F to +140° F) ambient air; Storage: -30° C to +85° C (-22° F to +185° F) Humidity: 5 % to 95 % non-condensing; FCC: Part15, FCC Rules for Class A Digital Device (emissions)
1 ION7330 and ION7350 models only
DIGITALPOWERMETER20SJ
The 2007 award recognizes Schneider Electric for its technological advancements and wide product range in the field of power quality (PQ) and energy management solutions. In total, this is the fourth award that Schneider Electric and [recently acquired] Power Measurement have received from Frost & Sullivan in recognition of achievements in this arena.Prithvi Raj, Frost & Sullivan research analyst
Please contact your local sales representative for ordering information.
Visit www.powerlogic.com for more information on other PowerLogic products, applications and system solutions.
Features and options ION7300 ION7330 ION7350
Metering
Power, energy and demand n n n
Power quality
Dip/swell monitoring n
Harmonics: individual, even, odd, up to 15th 15th 31st
Sampling rate, maximum samples per cycle 32 32 64
Logging and recording
Standard memory 300 kB 300 kB
Min/max logging for any parameter n n n
Historical logs, maximum # of channels 32 96
Waveform logs, maximum # of cycles 48
Timestamp resolution in seconds 0.001 0.001
Communications and I/O
RS-485 ports 1 2 2
Ethernet/infrared optical ports 1/ 1 1/ 1 1/ 1
Internal modem 1 1
PROFIBUS DP port 1
DNP 3.0 through serial, modem, and i/r ports n n
Modbus RTU slave on serial, modem, and i/r ports n n n
Modbus TCP through Ethernet port n n n
EtherGate data transfer between Ethernet & RS-485 n n
ModemGate data transfer between internal modem & RS-485
n n
MeterM@il, logged data alarms via email1 n n
WebMeter, onboard web server n n n
Analog inputs/analog outputs 4/4 4/4 4/4
Digital status inputs/counter 4 4
Digital relay outputs 4 4 4
Setpoints, alarming, and control
Setpoints, number/minimum response time 1 sec 1 sec
Math, logic, trig, log, linearisation formulas n n
Single & multi-condition alarms n n
Call-out on alarms n
Other metering functions
MV-90 on serial, Ethernet ports n n
Multi-year scheduling: hourly activity profiles n n
Schneider Electric35 Rue Joseph MonierCS 3032392506 Rueil Malmaison CedexTel : +33 (0)1 41 29 70 00 www.schneider-electric.com www.powerlogic.com
PLSED106015EN 01-2010 ART# 821267 © 2010 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved
As standards, specifications and designs develop over time, always ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. ION, ION Enterprise, Modbus, and PowerLogic are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
Publishing: Schneider Electric Production: Schneider Electric PMCPrinting: Imprimerie du Pont de Claix - made in France
Printed on recycled paper
File# 002188
1
The ASCO 7000 Se r i e s Closed-Transition Sof t Load Power Transfer Switch gives you the flexibilit y to:
• Satisfy a broad range of power applications
• Reduce energy costs by shaving your facility’s peak energy demand
• Export/import power to/from the electric utility
• Capitalize on the benefits of remote command and control
• Manage energy use more efficiently
• Ensure the level of power reliability required by your
operations or process
• Switch critical loads between live utility and onsite power sources seamlessly
• Maintain parallel operation of both power sources
• Assure emergency transfer operation upon utility power failure
Protecting data centers, hospitals, airports, retail stores and other facilities
The ASCO 7000 Series Soft Load Power Transfer Switch:
• Seamlessly transfers loads between acceptable utility power and onsite genera-tion with vir tually no volt-age or frequency transients
• Transfers power using prov-en ASCO Closed-Transition Transfer Switches (CTTS)
• Automatically selects emer-gency standby transfer operation upon loss of utility power
• Enables you to monitor and control soft load operation using GUIs (graphical user interfaces) with user-friendly, pull-down menus
• Actively synchronizes the onsite generating unit to the utility source by auto-matically adjusting the gen-erating unit’s governor and voltage regulator (analog or pulse width modulated outputs control the governor)
• Actively controls generator kW and power factor during parallel operation
• Contains protective functions on utility and generator sources required for ongoing parallel operation
• Allows you to activate protective functions using the touch screen (each function can be programmed to signal an external breaker and/or alarm signal, or just dis-play the condition on the GUI)
• Maximizes security with multiple levels of password protection
• Records and time stamps events and all changes to protective function settings
• Provides digital inputs with adjustable trip and reset time delays to control or monitor external devices
• Is available in 150 – 4000 amperes
• Listed to UL 1008, the industry safety standard for transfer switch equipment
Whatever your application, the ASCO 7000 Se r i e s Sof t Load Power Transfer Switch can meet your load transfer requirements with an unsurpassed range of features and benefits.
2
The ASCO 7000 Series Soft Load Power Transfer Switch synchronizes and parallels two independent power sources, without interrupting power flow. The switch can be programmed to either maintain parallel operation of both power sources, or transfer the load to the onsite generating unit, avoiding transients caused by block loading.
Synchronizing Power Ensures Continuity
24-hour protection no matter when trouble strikes
3
Coupled with Web-enabled ASCO POWERQUEST® command and control, the Soft Load Power Transfer Switch enables you to use your onsite generation unit for soft load transferring, base loading, importing or exporting.
Soft Load Power Transferring
In the soft load power trans-fer mode, the transfer switch synchronizes and parallels the onsite generating unit to the utility source, then immediately instructs the generating unit to assume a preset load value (Gen Minimum Load Setpoint). The Soft Load Controller then continues to control generator excitation to the preset
power factor setting. It begins increasing load on the engine at a preset ramp time rate. At the point the load on the util-ity source drops to the cutoff value, the switch disconnects the utility feeder.
Continuous Base Loading
In the base loading mode, the generating unit operates con-tinuously in parallel with the utility source until operation is discontinued on command. While operating, the soft load controller holds the load and power factor to the generat-ing unit constant. Load varia-tions are carried by the utility source. The switch retransfers the load to the utility source if the generating unit malfunc-tions.
Power Importing or Exporting
In the importing or export-ing modes, the power transfer switch maintains the generating unit in par-allel with the utility source. The switch’s Soft Load Controller instructs the gen-erating unit to produce the required output and var-ies the load on the unit to maintain the set import or export level. Load variations are carried by the generat-ing unit up to the maximum generator load setting.
If either the utility or gen-erator power fails in any of the modes, the load auto -matically transfers to the available source.
EC ComInterface
EngineControl
Gov.VR
NetworkDevice
DSL orCable Modem
Power Manager XP
Soft Load Controller
7000 SERIES
CTTS Controller
internal communications
external communications
www
Power Transfer Switch
UtilityService
Device27/59 Voltage81 U/O Frequency25C Sync Check
Ethernet
Networking Media
Device25 Synchronizer
Analog Speed/Load Adjust0-9 VDC +/- VDCPulse Width Modulation
Analog Voltage / P.F. Adjust0-9 VDC +/- VDC
Engine ControllerProprietary ProtocolRS 486
Power Manager XP
Remote Computer
Connectionto Internet
LANComputer
WANComputer
EngineGenerator
The transfer switch schematic illustrates communications paths that enable users to remotely monitor and control operation of the Closed-Transition Soft Load Power Transfer Switch with ASCO’s exclusive POWERQUEST® command and control connectivity. End users can monitor system status, load management settings, event logs and alarms from anywhere in the world, and receive e-mail paging for alarm signals. Communications paths include Internet, intranet, and/or Modbus networks via Ethernet, serial and/or DSL, or cable modem interfaces.
ASCO POWERQUEST® enables remote communications
4
ASCO power transfer switch-es—the standard of the indus-try—synchronize and parallel generation and utility power, allowing critical load transfers without momentary outages or surges.
Overlapping main electrical contacts using a reliable and field-proven solenoid
operating mechanism enable make-before-break transfers that help ensure continuous power. Control logic continu-ously monitors power source conditions and automatically determines whether the load transfer should be open (con-ventional, non-overlap mode), or closed transition. Failure to synchronize indication and
extended parallel time pro-tection is built in to prevent abnormal operation.
7000 Series power transfer switches are available in ampacity sizes of 150 – 4000.
Above switch rated 3000 amps in a Type 3R outdoor enclosure typically used with a 2 MW gen-set
7000 Series Controller 7000 Series User Control and Indicator Panel 7000 Series Soft Load Controller Power Transfer Switch
Ground Bus 5200 Series Power Manager XP (utility) 5200 Series Power Manager XP (generator)
Both the Closed-Transition Soft Load Power Transfer Switch and the Bypass-Isolation Soft Load Power Transfer Switch feature identical electrical ratings and heavy-duty mechanical interlocks that assure proper operation. The transfer switches feature a family of innovative electronic components that help make the switches the most advanced in the world.
ASCO 7000 Series Closed-Transition Soft Load Power Transfer Switch
ASCO is the global leader in power switching and controls
5
The ASCO 7000 Series Closed-Transition Soft Load Power Transfer Switch with bypass-isolation switch-ing allows the switch to be inspected, tested and main-tained without interrupting power, whether it’s being provided from the utility or onsite generator.
A drawout mechanism power transfer switch helps ensure ease of service and mainte-nance. Simple bypass and isolation functions require only two operating handles. Bypass contacts carry current only during the bypass mode.
The bypass switch has dead front quick-make, quick-break operation for trans-
ferring loads between live sources. It is fully rated for use as a manual three-posi-tion emergency power trans-fer switch in the event of a utility power failure when the transfer switch is in the isolated position. It is available in ampacity sizes of 150 – 4000.
Above Switch rated 2000 amps in a Type 3R outdoor enclosure
ASCO 7000 Series Soft Load Power Transfer Switch with Bypass-Isolation
6
Critical Loads Demand ASCO
Advanced Power Control and Monitoring
Two Power Managers, one each dedicated to utility and onsite power sources, provide protective relay functions for reliable parallel operation of the sources. The power managers include digital inputs and out-puts (Device 86).
In addition to directional power, a directional overcur-rent device provides the most reliable protection against undesirable backfeeding of onsite power to the utility grid.
Utility Source Power Manager
• Device 27/59 Under and over voltage• Device 32 Directional power• Device 46 - Negative sequence overcurrent
• Device 47 - Negative sequence voltage• Device 67 - Directional overcurrent• Device 81 - Under and over frequency• Device 86 - Lockout relay Generator Source Power Manager • Device 27/59 - Under and over voltage • Device 32 - Directional power • Device 40 - Loss of excitation (excess VARs) • Device 81 - Under and over frequency • Device 86 - Lockout relay
7000 Series Soft Load Controller The Soft Load Controller is an industrial computer for con-trolling all soft load and paral-lel operation. The Controller communicates with the power transfer switch, controller, utility and generator Power Managers, engine-genera-tor set controls, remote ASCO POWERQUEST® clients and facility supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems. This component:
• Actively controls engine generator output voltage and speed to synchronize the onsite power source with utility power (Device 25)
• Includes analog and PWM (pulse width modulated) out-
puts for controlling engine speed/loading and analog output for generator voltage/power factor
• Includes communication ports that provide Internet and intranet access for status checks and remote control
• Records and displays a time-and-date-stamped log of all system events and alarms (including those caused by protective trip functions)
• Includes a GUI (graphical user interface) for system set up, monitoring, and control
5200 Series Power Manager XP
Creative, responsive, customer - focused and competitive.
7
(rear view)
(front view)
Control Interfaces
The Controller—the most advanced digital controller in the industry—automatically starts the engine and controls load transfer to an onsite power source in the event of a utility power outage. If the onsite power source fails, it automatically transfers the load to the utility power source in an open transition mode.
It includes all voltage, frequency, control and timing functions required for emer-gency and standby power applications. Touch pad programming establishes all operational settings and features, without the need for meters or variable power supplies.
The panel organizes a three- position selector switch for “Auto,” “Soft Load Transfer” and “Transfer Preset” operation and LED status indicators.
AUTO is the normal setting for auto-matic soft load transfers initi-ated remotely.
SOFT LOAD TRANSFER manu-ally selects the soft load mode of operation regardless of the settings in the soft load power transfer controller. The time in the parallel position is
based on the generator load/ unload ramp time setting.
TRANSFER PRESET manually initiates a soft load power transfer based on the soft load controller set-tings (base loading, soft load transferring or importing/exporting).
Additional controls enable users to set bypass time delays and reset alarms.
7000 Series User Control and Indicator Panel
Microprocessor-Based Controllers On-board diagnostics provide control panel and automatic transfer switch sta-tus information to analyze sys-tem performance. Password protection prevents unauthor-ized use.
The microprocessor logic board is separated and isolated from the power board to improve electrical noise immunity performance and to help assure compliance with rigorous transient suppression standards. (See page 12 for standards compliance chart.)
Creative, responsive, customer - focused and competitive.
World-class technology forreliable power transfer
8
The intuitive, touch-screen GUI (graphical user interface) Panel displays at-a-glance operational status and enables users to set, monitor and con-trol all functions quickly and easily. Menu bars simplify and speed navigation.
This screen shows that soft load transfer can be initiated automatically at a preset time or level of integrated kW demand. With a time-of-day setting, the operating mode would continue for a pre-scribed duration. With a kW demand setting, the operat-ing mode would continue
until kW demand dropped below the preset kW level. Selecting both time- of-day and kW integrated settings enables either setting to initi-ate operation, but both set-tings must be satisfied before operation can be terminated automatically.
The Home Screen, Source Summary Screen, Load Management Settings Screen and Event Log Screen illustrate the range of data available through the panel. More than 50 screens provide users with total control and access to information on every aspect of system operation.
X X
Average kW every...
:
Timer Operation
Start at...
Reset at...
Reset Time Delay
LOAD MANAGEMENT SETTINGS Automat ic Se t t ings
min15
15
Page 3 o f 5
Run Today Starting at ...
Enabled
00
hour2 30 min
For a duration of ...
Present Time:
Enabled
min30
300
250
kW
kW
14 : 34
kW Demand Operation
ASCO
7000 Series soft Load Graphical User Interface Panels
23% 35%
REWOL
S R
ETSAF
0o
180 o
113 kW 174kW
491VL 149Aavg 60.0Hz
128kVA -54kVAR 0.90pf 184kVA 58kVAR 0.95pf
491VL 213Aavg 60.0Hz
287kW
Sources Paralled-Gen Loaded to Setpoint MAR 31, 2004 13 : 13
UTILITY GENERATOR
ASCO
Source Accepted Accepted Source
Preset Mode :
Base Load
7000 Series Home Screen This screen includes a syn-chroscope representation that shows the relative phase angle between the two sourc-es of power. This screen also displays:
• Phase-to-phase voltage, frequency, current, kW, kVA and kVAR for each power source
• Percent of load being supplied from each source
• Load kW and system status
• Power transfer switch position
• Preset mode of operation
• Open or closed position of both power source breakers
Ensure continuous power for your operations
9
7000 Series Source Summary Screen A screen for each power source shows detailed displays of a variety of electrical parameters:
• Phase voltages and currents, line-neutral voltages, average phase voltage and current
• Voltage and current unbalances
• Phase voltage
• Frequency and power factor
• Utility source import and export kWh
• Power source kW, kVA and kVAR
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Average
Frequency
Current Unbalance
Voltage Unbalance
Phase Rotation
Reactive Power
Apparent Power
Watt Demand
kWH Import
kWH Export
kWH Net
Power Factor
Amps VL-L
kW
kVar
kVA
kW
Ut i l i ty Source
Hz
%
%
VL-N
142
160
147
149
60.0
3
1
146
28
174
ABC
0.90
489
495
490
491
-54
128
0
Real Power 113
Clear kWH
282
286
283
284
ASCO
7000 Series Load Management Settings Screen A series of system configura-tion screens, such as this one, enable users to set system parameters, protective con-trol functions and eight pro-grammable user inputs for alarming or signaling con-ditions of external devices. Multiple levels of password protection control access to the screens. Users can use this screen to set:
• System operation—soft load
transferring, base loading or importing/ex-porting modes
• Soft load ramp time
• Utility power cutoff setpoint
• Base load kilowatt setpoint
• Import or export kilowatt setpoint
Switching Device
Preset Mode
Load Control
Load Setpoint
Utility Cutoff
Ramp Time Seconds
Base Load
Import
Export
Base Load
Import
Export
LOAD MANAGEMENT SETTINGS Mode Se t t ings
% kW
kW
kW
35 174
kW%
20
10 50CTTS
Page 1 o f 5
Soft Load Transfer
Disable Preset Mode
Device
ASCO
7000 Series Event Log Screen This screen displays any of the last 1000 events that are automatically time-and-date stamped and saved in an historical database. The event log saves all user acknowledgements, including the ID of the acknowledging user. Event categories cover:
• Transfer switch status, including transfers to the onsite power or utility sources
• Utility and onsite power
source status, including tripping of protective functions, exceeding sys-tem setpoints, acceptance of permissive setpoints and status of user-defined discrete inputs, and feeder circuit breaker status
• Engine generator status, including engine start/stop and user-defined engine alarms and shut-downs
EVENT LOG
Date Time Description Cause User
04/01/04 00:37:00 Transfer to Gen ----------
04/01/04 00:37:00 Load On Generator ----------
04/01/04 00:36:59 Waiting for Transfer to Gen ---------- ----------
04/01/04 00:36:29 Ramping Gen Load Up ---------- ----------
04/01/04 00:36:28 Sources Paralleled ---------- ----------
04/01/04 00:36:20 Paralleling to Generator ---------- ----------
04/01/04 00:36:20 Gen Source Available ---------- ----------
04/01/04 00:36:15 Engine Start ----------
03/31/04 12:19:23 System in Standby ---------- ----------
01/31/03 17:05:30 Gen Under Frequency ----------Trip
768 Events Page 5 of 77
Transfer Preset Mode
----------
Transfer Preset Mode
ASCO
10
Closed-Transition Soft Load Transfer Switch
The sample catalog number below is 7ASLSA3400N5C
To order an ASCO 7000 Series Closed-Transition Soft Load Transfer Switch, use the following sample catalog number for the switch you want:
Ordering Information
7 A SLS + A + 3 + 400 + N + 5 + C
Product Neutral Phase Amperes Voltage Grp Cabinet Code* Poles Code Code
A Automatic SLS Soft Load — No Neutral 3 150 C 208 Closed- 260 D 220 5X- C Type 1 enclosure Transition A Solid 400 E 230 optional M Type 3R secure SLB Soft Load Neutral 600 F 240 accessories enclosure W/Bypass- B Switched 800 L 440 Isolation Neutral 1000 M 460 Switch C Overlapping 1200 N 480 Neutral 1600 P 550 2000 Q 575 3000 R 600 4000
* Note: Specify neutral code B (optional) on switches rated 150-3000 amps and neutral code C on switches rated 4000 amps.
7000 Ser ies
11
Switch Rating Max. # of Conductors Range of AL-CU Amps per Terminal Conductor Sizes
150, 260, 400 One #4 AWG to 600 MCM
600 Two #1/0 AWG to 600 MCM
800 – 1200 Four #1/0 AWG to 600 MCM
1600 – 2000 Six #1/0 AWG to 600 MCM
3000 – 4000 Twelve #1/0 AWG to 600 MCM
Switch Rating Max. # of Conductors Range of AL-CU Amps per Terminal Conductor Sizes
150, 260, 400 One #4 to 600 AWG
600 – 800 Three #2 AWG to 600 MCM
1000 – 1200 Four #1/0 AWG to 600 MCM
1600 – 2000 Six #1/0 AWG to 600 MCM
3000 Ten #1/0 AWG to 600 MCM
4000 Twelve #1/0 AWG to 600 MCM
Closed-Transition Soft Load Transfer Switch Terminals
Sizes of UL-Listed Solderless Screw-Type Terminals for External Power Connections
Bypass-Isolation Soft Load Transfer Switch Terminals
Sizes of UL-Listed Solderless Screw-Type Terminals for External Power Connections
Microprocessor-Based Controllers
Transient Suppression Standards Compliance Emission Standard – Group 1, Class A FCC Part 15, Class A
Generic Immunity Standard, from which: EN 50082-2:1995
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Immunity EN 61000-4-2:1995
Radiated Electromagnetic Field Immunity FCC Part 15, Class A
Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) Immunity EN 61000-4-4:1995
Surge Transient Immunity EN 61000-4-5:1995
Conducted Radio-Frequency Field Immunity EN 61000-4-6:1996
Voltage Dips, Interruptions and Variations Immunity EN 61000-4-11:1994
7000 Ser ies
7000 Ser ies
7000 Ser ies
12
Switch Rating Poles Width Height Depth amps inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm)
Enclosed UL Type 1 (Consult ASCO for Type 3R dimensions.)
150, 260, 4001 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 24 (610) 56 (1422) 14 (356)
600 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 24 (610) 63 (1600) 17 (432)
800, 1000 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 34 (864) 72 (1829) 20 (508)
1200 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 38 (965) 87 (2210) 23 (584)
1600 – 20002 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 38 (965) 91 (2311) 48 (1219)
1600 – 20002 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 38 (965) 87 (2210) 23 (584) (front connected)
30002 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 38 (965) 91 (2311) 60 (1524)
40002 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 60 (1524) 70 (1778) 53 (1272)
Switch Rating Poles Width Height Depth amps inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm)
Enclosed UL Type 1 (Consult ASCO for Type 3R dimensions.)
150, 200, 230, 260, 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 34 (864) 85 (2159) 28 (711) 400, 6001
8001,3 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 38 (965) 91 (2311) 32 (813)
800, 1000, 12001,2 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 38 (965) 91 (2311) 48 (1219)
1600 – 20001,2 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 38 (965) 91 (2311) 60 (1524)
30001,2 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 38 (965) 91 (2311) 72 (1829)
40002 3 or 3 with neutral A/B 60 (1524) 91 (2311) 96 (2438)
Closed-Transition Soft Load Transfer Switch Dimensions6
Bypass-Isolation Soft Load Transfer Switch Dimensions6
Notes:
1. Handles extend 6-1/4 inches (159mm).
2. Recommended clearance to enclosure: 3 feet (914mm) from rear, 4 feet (1219mm) from front (25 inches required for transfer switch drawout). Side or rear access required.
3. Conventional switched neutral is provided on 7A DTB and 7N DTB switching arrangements when specified (optional Code B).
4. Specify optional accessory 40HY for 600 amp front-connected arrangement and 40JY for 800 amp. All service and load capabilities limited to top entry only.
5. Contact ASCO for details.
6. All dimensions shown are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes. Certified dimensions can be furnished upon request.
7000 Ser ies
7000 Ser ies Power Connection Configuration
FrontConnected
Front
Connected
Side/RearConnected
Side/RearConnected
Side/Rear
Connected
Rear Connected
Dimensions
13
Switch Rating Poles Type 1* amps Enclosure
150, 260, 400, 600 3 1140 (518)
150, 260, 400, 600 3 with B 1200 (545)
800, 1000, 1200 3 1680 (762)
800, 1000, 1200 3 with B 1750 (794)
1600 – 2000 3 2495 (1132)
1600 – 2000 3 with B 2675 (1213)
3000 3 2830 (1276)
3000 3 with B 3460 (1560)
3000 3 6300 (2858)
4000 3 with B 6900 (3130)
Switch Rating Poles Type 1* amps Enclosure
150, 260, 400 3 325 (148)
150, 260, 400 3 with B 335 (152)
600 3 425(193)
600 3 with B 435(198)
800, 1000 3 510 (231)
800, 1000 3 with B 540 (244)
1200 3 800 (362)
1200 3 with B 830 (375)
1600 – 2000 3 1410 (637)
1600 – 2000 3 with B 1460 (660)
3000 3 2210 (998)
3000 3 with B 2280 (1031)
4000 3 2239 (1012)
4000 3 with B 2413 (1093)
Bypass-Isolation Soft Load Transfer Switch Shipping Weights
*( Export shipments may require a wooden box. Contact ASCO for weights and dimensions. Consult ASCO for Type 3R shipping weights.)
Closed-Transition Soft Load Transfer Switch Shipping Weights
*( Export shipments may require a wooden box. Contact ASCO for weights and dimensions. Consult ASCO for Type 3R shipping weights.)
7000 Ser ies
7000 Ser ies
14
Emerson Network Power and the Emerson Network Power logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co. ©2010 Emerson Electric Co.
Publication 3071 R7 © June, 2010 Printed in the U.S.A.
ASCO Power Technologies50 Hanover Road F lorham Park, NJ 07932USA
800 800 ASCOwww.ascopower.comwww.ascoapu.com
Emerson Network Power. The global leader in enabling Business-Critical ContinuityTM. EmersonNetworkPower.com
AC Power
Connectivity
DC Power
Embedded Computing
Embedded Power
Infrastructure Management & Monitoring
Outside Plant
Power Switching & Controls
Precision Cooling
Racks & Integrated Cabinets
Services
Surge Protection
T H E U N I N T E R R U P T I B L E P O W E R P R O V I D E R
www.mgeups.com
After considerable success worldwide, MGE is pleased to introduce the Galaxy PW for
the North American market. The Galaxy PW’s popularity is not only due to it's exceptional
reliability track record but also due to its modular design that permits the paralleling of
modules for capacity or redundancy without extra paralleling gear. The Galaxy PW can
also be field upgraded up to 225 kVA addressing smaller increases in power requirements
without incurring the cost of another UPS module. Providing up to 225 kVA/200 kW in
a space saving 11 square feet, the Galaxy PW has one of the highest power densities
available complimented by a 0.9+ output factor to perfectly match load profiles.
Built on the reliability of the original Galaxy PW, the next generation PW offers improvements
including generator friendly topology to avoid excessive generator over-sizing requirements.
Other notable features include a user friendly operator interface, high energy efficiency, and
advanced battery management system with automated self testing, alerting you to battery
performance issues before they have a chance to affect UPS reliability.
Installed in over 5000 critical applications, the Galaxy PW is the right choice for your power protection needs.
Advanced Features
◗ 0.9 Output Power Factor
◗ Modular Design for Easy
Upgrading or Expansion
◗ Parallel Modules for Capacity
or Redundancy
◗ Field Upgradeable Power Output**
◗ Low kVAR Input Filter
◗ Generator Friendly for Low UPS to
Generator Sizing Ratios
◗ Proven Reliability in over
5,000 Installations
◗ Advanced Battery Management
System with Automatic Self Testing
◗ Front Access Design
◗ Small Footprint/Very High
Power Density
◗ Simple, Secure and Easy to
Read Operator Interface
◗ Backed by MGE's 700 Field
Service Engineers
** on 100-200 kVA modules only
Galaxy PW100, 130, 150, 180, 200, 225 KVA
Next Generation Critical Power Protection System
MGE UPS SYSTEMS
Galaxy PWqxd.pdf 10/15/02 10:21 AM Page 1
U-Talk card
RS232/RS485 serial card
USB
SNMP or XML Web card
Dry Contact Relay card
A back-lit, wide-angle graphic display lets you scrollthrough clear messages presenting
detailed information on diagnostics and UPS status. An event log tracks all alarm and eventsincluding UPS and battery lifecycle data. All alarmsare clearly explained in detail to walk operatorssafely through any situation.
◗ LED Mimic Diagram◗ Alarm Event Log◗ Battery and UPS Cycle Monitor◗ Self Diagnostic Report
Battery failure is the leading cause of UPS reliability issues. The Galaxy PW’s integrated battery diagnostic system automatically performs periodic battery health tests, alerting operators to irregularities before they have a chance to affect UPS performance.
The Galaxy PW utilizes MGEs low KVAR filter tolimit leading power factor on the input. This eliminates the need for costly generator oversizing and eliminates common UPSgenerator compatibility issues.
The Critical Bus Synchronization (CBS) module keeps the outputs of two UPS modules in sync with
each other under all operating conditions. This assures a seamless transfer between UPS modules
when using downstream static transfer switches.
From dry contact status relays, to web based
status cards, the Galaxy PW can be equipped
with any communication interface.
User Friendly Interface Integrated Battery Diagnostics Generator Friendly
Critical Bus Synchronization Communication Solutions
CBS
Preferred Source
Alternate Source
UPS 1
UPS 2
Epsilon STS
2
1
Q3BP
Q4S
Galaxy 1
Galaxy 22
1Galaxy 32
1Galaxy 42
2
Q5N1
225 kVA 450 kVA 675 kVA 675 kVAN+1
No additional paralleling gear required!
Simple and secure paralleling technologyGalaxy PW modules can be paralleled for redundancy or capacity simply by bussing the output of themodules together. All paralleling intelligence resides in each module for true redundancy. Up to threemodules can be paralleled for capacity and four modules for redundancy. A system level wrap aroundmaintenance bypass facilitates easy cable landing while providing a system level maintenance bypass.Internal maintenance bypasses on each UPS module allow each module to be isolated for maintenance.
Upgradeable Power LevelsThe Galaxy PW is field upgradeable up to 225 kVA,providing the extra power you need without theexpense of added equipment or installation costs.
Scalable and Upgradeable Power
Reliability Advantages
Galaxy PW Peripherals
Galaxy PW-Redefining Power Quality
Web BasedMonitoring
Galaxy PWqxd.pdf 10/15/02 10:21 AM Page 2
Energy Efficiency – Cost Savings that MattersA major factor in selecting a high-power UPS is its efficiency. The reason is simple,
an efficiency advantage of only 3 to 4% over five years can represent a savings in
electricity costs equivalent to half the cost of the UPS! Furthermore, most UPSs
supply continuous average loads that amount to only 50 to 60% of their rated
output, a level where their efficiency is far from optimum. Galaxy PW offers
among the highest efficiency available in today's market and efficiency that
remains virtually constant from 25 to 100% of rated power. The result is often a real
cost savings that makes the Galaxy PW the least expensive choice in the long run.
Real Time ReferenceSine Wave
Digital Wave FormCorrection
Digital Power Quality Management
MGE’s exclusive Digital Power Quality precisely regulates voltage for distortion free power.
Excellent Transient Load ResponseUnder any circumstances, a UPS must be capable of instantly supplying its full rated load without
affecting the voltage regulation. Galaxy PW can handle this demand without transfer to the
bypass line, while maintaining the output voltage well within the tolerance limits demanded by
sensitive equipment (±5% voltage variation for a 100% load step change).
Power Surge caused from startup servers, motors ordistribution transformers
UPS System Load
UPS Output Voltage
Unsafe Output VoltageRisk of equipment failure
Safe Voltage Windowregulated by EPS 6000
Traditional UPSEPS 6000
0
100%
The sleek, modular design of the Galaxy PW has been proven reliable in over 5000
installations world wide prior to being offered in the North American market.
The Galaxy PW features:
◗ A tried and tested 3rd generation electronic control architecture
◗ IGBT based inverter technology and innovative connector technologies
to significantly reduce the number of PC boards and connections for
improved reliability
◗ Integrated self protection features such as sub-cycle current limiting to
protect the UPS against dead shorts
◗ Board level self diagnostics and auto calibration to ensure proper
performance under all operating conditions
MGE Legendary IGBT inverter technology: MGE pioneered the use of IGBT inverter
technology for UPSs. The Galaxy PW uses third generation inverter technology that delivers
precision voltage regulation under all operating conditions, total harmonic management
and a robust design that protects the UPS from damage even in the event of a dead short.
efficiency
load
92% 93.5% 93.5%
25% 50% 75% 100%
Precision Power Quality
Digital Power QualityManagementPerfect Power: The Galaxy PW uses MGE's DigitalPower Quality (DPQ) technology to deliver preciselyregulated, practically distortion free power under alloperating conditions. DPQ technology compares theoutput wave form to a computer simulated waveform. Any imperfections are immediately correctedusing tiny sub-cycle pulses maintaining a pure sinewave output under all load conditions.
The Proven Solution
Galaxy PW
Galaxy PW
Galaxy PWqxd.pdf 10/15/02 10:21 AM Page 3
UPS Module Specifications 100 kVA 130 kVA 150 kVA
Input Voltage (V) 208 480 480 600 208 480 480 600 208 480 480 600Output Voltage (V) 208 208 480 600 208 208 480 600 208 208 480 600Nominal Input Current (A) 311 135 135 108 414 180 180 144 483 210 210 168Maximum Input Current (A) 343 149 149 119 455 198 198 158 531 231 231 185Nominal Output Current (A) 278 279 121 97 361 361 157 126 416 418 181 145DC Current at Nominal Voltage (A) 219 283 331Efficiency at 100% 92.5% 93% 93%Full Load Heat Rejection (BTUs) 25600 31060 35840UPS Module Weight (lbs) 3050* 3050* 3050*Module Width (75”H x 33”D) 48” 48” 48”
180 kVA 200 kVA 225 kVAInput Voltage (V) 208 480 480 600 208 480 480 600 208 480 480 600Output Voltage (V) 208 208 480 600 208 208 480 600 208 208 480 600Nominal Input Current (A) 600 260 260 208 692 300 300 240 692 300 300 240Maximum Input Current (A) 660 286 286 229 738 320 320 256 738 320 320 256Nominal Output Current (A) 501 501 217 174 556 556 241 217 625 625 271 217DC Current at Nominal Voltage (A) 392 438 442Efficiency at 100% 93% 93.5% 93.5%Full Load Heat Rejection (BTUs) 43000 44370 45000UPS Module Weight (lbs) 3050* 3050* 3050*Module Width (75”H x 33”D) 48” 48” 48”*UPS module only~does not include transformer and auxiliary cabinets
MGE UPS SYSTEMS T H E U N I N T E R R U P T I B L E P O W E R P R O V I D E [email protected]
GX PW 100Effective: October 2002
©MGE UPS SYSTEMS, Inc. All specifications subject to change without notice. The MGE UPS SYSTEMS logo is a trademark of MGE UPS SYSTEMS.
ARGENTINAThames 911609 San IsidroProv de Buenos Airestel (54) 11-4766-8777fax (54) 11-4766-6008
USA (headquarters)1660 Scenic AvenueCosta Mesa, CA 92626tel (800) 523-0142
(714) 557-1636fax (714) 557-9788
CANADA#9, 2798 Thamesgate Dr.Mississauga, ON L4T 4E8tel (905) 672-0990
(877) 672-0990fax (905) 672-7667
BRAZILAvenida GuidoCaloi 1985 (GALPAO 23)GuarapirangaSao Paulo - SP, CEP 05802tel (55) 11-5891-2274fax (55) 11-5890-3353
MEXICOAve. Congreso de laUnion#524 Colonia Santa AnitaMexico D.F 08300tel 525 538 9687fax 525 530 7625
N
A
B
C
G
L1
L2
L3
G
L1
L2
L3
QF1 QF1 QF1QF1
INPUT ISOLATION Transformer
(OPTIONAL)
INVERTERSTATIC SWITCHCHARGER
G–+ BATTERY
OUTPUTFUSES
Q1
L1L2
INPUTFUSES
STATIC SWITCH
OUTPUT ISOLATION Transformer
(OPTIONAL)
G–+
BATTERY
FROMUTILITYINPUT
TOCRITICAL
LOAD
I/0 CABINET(OPTIONAL
with Input orOutput
Transformers)
UPS MODULE
INPUTFILTER
Q4S K4S
Q5N
Q38P
BYPASS
N
A
B
C
G
L1
L2
L3
L3
Galaxy PW Battery Systems ~ Backup time in minutes at 100% load @ 0.8 power factorQty. Cabinets Weight (lbs) 100 kVA 130 kVA 150 kVA 180 kVA 200 kVA 225 kVA CB Rating
0.8 PF 0.9 PF 0.8 PF 0.9 PF 0.8 PF 0.9 PF 0.8 PF 0.9 PF 0.8 PF 0.9 PF 0.8 PF 0.9 PF
1 3,070 10 8 7 5 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 250 A
2 6,140 30 26 22 17 16 13 12 10 10 8 8 6 250 A
3 9,210 50 44 35 30 30 25 22 19 20 17 16 13 250 A
4 12,280 75 64 50 44 41 36 35 30 30 26 26 21 250 A
1 3,734 17 14 11 9 9 7 6 n/a 5 n/a n/a n/a 250 A
2 7,468 41 35 30 26 25 22 20 17 17 14 14 12 250 A
3 11,202 74 62 50 43 42 37 33 28 30 26 24 22 250 A
4 14,936 105 93 75 64 60 53 48 42 42 37 36 33 250 A
1 4,770 23 19 15 12 12 9 8 5 6 n/a n/a n/a 400 A
2 9,540 59 52 42 36 36 31 28 23 24 20 19 16 400 A
3 14,310 100 87 74 61 59 52 46 41 41 35 37 31 400 A
4 19,080 135 120 100 88 85 74 68 59 60 52 51 44 400 A
Single Line Diagram (single and parallel models)
Standard Features◗ IGBT/PWM Inverter◗ Low kVAR Input Filter◗ LED Mimic Diagram◗ Guided Operator Interface◗ Advanced Battery Management System◗ Modular Power Assemblies◗ Front Access Design◗ Computer Aided Self Diagnostics◗ RS2323/485 Serial Interface◗ Dry Contact Relay Status Array◗ Top to Bottom Access Models
AC Electrical Characteristics◗ Output Power Factor: > 0.9◗ Input Source: 208, 480, 600VAC 3PH,
3W + G (or 4W + G for Bypass)◗ Output: 208, 480, 600VAC 3PH,
3W + G, or 4W + G◗ Input Frequency Window: 60Hz/+ 10%◗ Inverter Sync. to Bypass: + 0.5 Hz
(adjustable from + 0.25 Hz to + 2 Hz)◗ Input THDI: < 7.5% at 225 kVA◗ Voltage Transient Response
(at 100% Step Load): + 2%◗ Inverter Overload Capacity (A): 150%
for 1 min.; 125% for 10 min.◗ Bypass Instant Overload (1 cycle):
22 times nominal current◗ THDV (linear loads): < 1.5% Ph/Ph,
< 2.0% Ph/N◗ THDV (non-linear loads): < 2.0% Ph/Ph,
< 3.0% Ph/N◗ Input Switch Q1: 400 A◗ Bypass Input Contactor: 265 A (350 IEC)◗ Bypass Switch(es) Q4S/Q38P/Q5N:
400A
DC Electrical Characteristics◗ DC Nominal Voltage: 480 VDC◗ Max. DC Float Voltage: 545 VDC◗ Min. DC Cut-Off Voltage: 390 VDC
Environmental Characteristics◗ Storage Temperature Range: -
25ºC to +70ºC◗ Operating Temperature Range:
0ºC to 40ºC◗ Relative Humidity: 95% maximum◗ Noise Level (dBA): 68
Battery System Features
◗ Individual cabinet dimensions: 75” H x 50” W x 33” D ◗ Run time specifications are for 77 °F/25 °C and may differ with temperature
◗ All cabinets have a standard internal battery disconnect ◗ Longer duration battery banks and wet cell batteries are available on request
◗ Cabinets may be ordered adjacent to the UPS or ◗ Above battery systems are housed in a matching enclosureremote available upon request
◗ All batteries specified above are sealed, low maintenance cells
Galaxy PWqxd.pdf 10/15/02 10:21 AM Page 4